Part I: The Colonizing of the Human Brain – The Voice to Skull Program: Classic CIA Torture

Chris Burton

Chris Burton was the founder of two Silicon Valley IT staffing and consulting companies and an art gallery for local Denver artists when he became a victim of America’s classified “Manhattan District” Electromagnetic/Neuro Weapons development and non-consensual experimentation program. Trapped in a psychotronic research lab he could not escape from, he founded three charity fundraising companies in hopes of appealing to the humanity of the US government which chose to further the covert ambitions of its intelligence agencies instead and continue the program. Chris’s story takes readers through the confounding experience of being electromagnetically kidnapped and tortured with no explanation with powerful Neuroweapon technology that revealed its full capabilities progressively, over a 13 year period, finally exposing the true purpose of the program in December of last year – the creation of a Manchurian Candidate.

Ed Note: “Voice to Skull” in this interview is being used by Chris as a catch-all Remote Neuro Tech term to cover “all of the psychotronic technologies that transmit an electromagnetic frequency into a target for the purposes of psychological or physiological study or torture.”

Ramola D: Chris, thank you so much first for coming forward to address these important issues of non-consensual neuro-experimentation, assault with military-grade weapons, neuro-hacking, synthetic telepathy, and bio-robotization. I also understand your story will reveal that Voice to Skull uses classic, documented CIA Torture techniques.

Chris Burton: Thank you for having me and for all of the hard work you’ve been putting into exposing psychotronic technology and the non-consensual experimentation programs associated with it. You are truly one of my personal heroes Ramola. I mean that.

This story is 100% true and details exactly what Voice to Skull experimentation programs–which CIA and Navy scientist Robert Duncan admits to having developed software for–are doing on a day-to-day basis to non-consensual test subjects around the world. I hope everybody reads the entire interview because the intent is not only to provide deep insight into the program and what Voice to Skull torture is, but also present a clear framework for understanding and communicating the intricacies of the experiments and the technology to friends, family, journalists, academics, elected officials, law enforcement, and the medical community.

Despite how incredible some of this technology might sound to the reader (because it parallels intriguing concepts such as telepathy), a critical takeaway could be that the US made a series of institutional-level decisions that put the most dangerous weapon system ever invented by man into the hands of everyday humans, who despite their “credentials” were no better equipped to handle such an awesome responsibility than your everyday citizen.

These are not technologies being developed by the military for altruistic purposes like curing mental illness or helping the paralyzed walk again. That kind of work is being conducted openly at public and private research facilities around the world and consists of programs tech billionaires, academia, and places like DARPA are clamoring to publicize their involvement in.

The programs I’m going to describe are military-directed NON-CONSENSUAL torture experiments designed to, as Robert Duncan describes, determine the “probability of death” and other psychological breaking points in a subject by pairing the operational military/intelligence advantages that EMF neuro-technology provides with classic torture techniques that allow war planners to conduct Stealth, No Touch, No Mark enemy interrogation, elimination, and Soviet-era-style psycho-prison detention programs around the world.

The institutional-level decisions to classify the weaponry; the identification and recruitment of some of the most fiendish minds on the planet; and the top-down adherence to protocols designed to protect all participants’ anonymity have combined, once again in human history, to create unimaginable atrocity and unexplainable cowardice in the only elements of society that can help (mainly law enforcement, academia, the medical community, human rights, and journalism).

Before we begin, I’d like to quickly point out to all of the techies out there that I’m not here to nitpick the definition of V2K versus RNM (Remote Neural Monitoring) versus something else. By using the term “Voice to Skull,” I’m talking about all of the psychotronic technologies that transmit an electromagnetic frequency into a target for the purposes of psychological or physiological study or torture.

To a Voice to Skull victim, there’s no delineation between hearing a voice, having your thoughts read, emotions being injected, dreams manipulated, communicating telepathically, or having your body parts moved. It’s all one continuous beam that shadows you everywhere you go and never stops transmitting/receiving evoked potentials which is the brain’s software code.

What’s becoming apparent to me, the longer I’m in the program, is that these psychotronic technologies are now becoming capable of influencing a person without them knowing it. This is where the tech is right now.The gulf between perceptible and imperceptible is quickly disappearing.

I think the best thing for me to do today is just to tell my story, describe the experiments and hopefully educate the public and the TI (“Targeted Individual”) community about Voice to Skull torture.

Ramola D: Thank you for that reminder of how profoundly invasive and dangerous these Stealth Military/Intelligence technologies are, for all humanity–why all of us should be paying close attention.

I understand you once had a very successful IT business, Chris. Can you start by telling us more about that?

Chris Burton: After I graduated from the University of Colorado, Boulder (Business, Finance), I moved to Seattle and started working for Aerotek. At the time Aerotek was enjoying rapid growth and is today the largest IT staffing company in the United States (now called Allegis).

After a year, I was recruited into a systems integration company called CompuCom Systems to work in their San Francisco office. My first cousin had just left medical school and was living in the Bay Area at the time and when I explained Aerotek’s business model to him we decided to start our own company, Dedicated Onsite Consulting (DOC). We recruited two of my former colleagues from Aerotek to join us and together we grew the company from zero to $12 million in annual revenue in 4 years which was very similar to building a branch office for Aerotek.

At the time, we had about 25 internal employees and 200 consultants in the field. Remedy Staffing offered us $9 million in cash, plus an earnout, for the company in 2000 but we turned them down, opting to continue growing the business. By 2001 the .COM crash and 9/11 severely impacted spending in Silicon Valley and, unfortunately, we didn’t have the working capital to survive the downturn.

By 2004, my cousin had moved to England to be with his fiancée who was completing her Ph.D in Environmental Law at Oxford, and my other two partners were focused on a real estate development project, so I started another IT consulting company called Watermill Consulting.

Watermill quickly became the number one provider of consulting services to Business Objects (now SAP) for their $23 million-dollar global PeopleSoft Financials, ESA, ELM, Vantive, and Salesforce.com implementations and was leading an ERP implementation at Dassault Systemes America (which included SolidWorks). You can find all of this info along with a personal recommendation from Business Objects’ and Yahoo’s head of IT on my LinkedIn profile. Watermill was competing against firms like Accenture for projects and winning because it was lean which meant if could bill less than our competitors and pay higher rates to consultants.

Ramola D: It sounds like you were exceptionally accomplished and successful in your career and you were all set to live a highly productive life.

Chris Burton: Yes. I owned a penthouse loft for ten years across the street from Coors Field in Denver’s LoDo neighborhood and thought I had set up a good life for myself. I was growing my second successful company which had netted over $600k in just over a year and because it was winning higher level projects Watermill could potentially be sold at a higher multiple (of its EBITDA) than DOC, down the road.

My sister, who’s a CMO (Chief Marketing Officer) looked up to me, I had a great group of friends and a very active social life. I even started an art gallery for local Denver artists called LUZ. I had no idea I was about to be put into a program like Voice to Skull.

LUZ Art Gallery, Denver

Ramola D: So at this point you had moved back from Silicon Valley to Denver where you had grown up, you had a second company which was very successful. Did anything go wrong from the start or were things fine at the beginning? How did the Voice to Skull program begin?

Chris Burton: Two important things happened in California in ’04 which I believe are connected to Voice to Skull. I’ll mention them now before we dive into the hell of Voice to Skull so the readers know everything I know about the possible origins of my torture program.

After the .com crash and 9/11, my first company, DOC, was on life support so I rented out my loft in Denver and moved back to the Bay Area in hopes of reviving it. I moved into a friend of a friend’s house in Half Moon Bay which was about a 40-minute drive from our office in San Mateo. Everything seemed fine until I found out my partners from DOC were no longer conducting staffing operations from our office and had become involved in a real estate development project which they wouldn’t tell me anything about. Because of this my cousin Joe, who was living in Oxford with his fiancé, and I decided to part ways with our business partners and sold our remaining shares in the company.

Before Joe and I sold our shares, I went to the office one night to read through our files because I was concerned that DOC money was being used to fund my business partners’ real estate project. When I walked into the office at about 8:00 pm, I immediately noticed a small file-holder/case sitting in the middle of the floor. It contained the contracts between my business partners and the banks from which they had secured their bank loans, and nothing else.

It was all of the information I was looking for and it was just laying right there in the middle of the floor as soon as I walked in. I practically tripped over it. At the time, I thought one of my partners had set it down and forgotten to pick it back up on their way out of the office but now I believe it was put there on purpose. The real estate project apparently turned into a huge disaster. The building was never built despite millions being raised for the project.

After I sold my shares in DOC, I started Watermill Consulting and started working on the Business Objects project. Things were going great until my landlord in Half Moon Bay, Michael Raines, started acting very strangely and did something so outrageous it defies explanation. This was the second thing that I believe is connected to Voice to Skull.

Ramola D: What exactly happened? What do you know of this person’s background and affiliations?

Chris Burton: Michael’s father was a patent attorney for Genentech and had made a lot of money before he passed away. I moved in with Michael because a mutual friend of ours said he was an okay guy. He was living in his mothers’ house on the first tee of the Half Moon Bay Golf Links.

Things were okay in the beginning but after a month or so I began noticing Michael hanging around my bedroom door whenever I was on the phone with my clients. I didn’t think too much about it until he started behaving as if he knew some big secret about me. When his friends would come over they would immediately run upstairs to Michael’s room, giggling like little kids, crouch in front of a TV and shut the door.

Michael, who, I learned after living with him, had done a year in federal prison for selling drugs and had a long criminal record, began gang-stalking me with his friends and actually attempted to shake me down for money claiming he had taped private conversations between me and my client which could damage my reputation. My client and I were good friends and often talked about funny stories having to do with other executives we knew (their personal lives, etc.) which put me in a vulnerable position.

The focus of his overt suspicions centered around my relationship with the Senior Director of IT for Business Objects who at this time had become a good friend of mine (we started working together in ‘96 when he ran IT for Levi Strauss). Christopher Brooks, the Senior Director, had his own company and had brought in my company to fulfill the staffing piece of the project at Business Objects. I had a consulting agreement with Christopher’s company which the founder of Business Objects, Bernard Liautaud, had personally approved, and a master service agreement with Business Objects so I had a very secure business relationship.

Michael’s posturing (about this “big secret”) turned from blind insinuation to overt intimidation when one day he started cleaning his shotgun in front of me and said something like, “Sometimes you never know who you’re dealing with…” From that point on, whenever his friends made an appearance in the house, they would stay silent and look at each other and grin whenever I tried to start a conversation.

I’m telling this story because Michael’s behavior was odder than anything I had ever experienced in my life up to that point. I moved out because of this, but a month later he invited me over so he could “apologize” so I went over to his house to find out what was going on and to keep things cool between us.

When I arrived, Michael was sitting in the living room with his friend Curtis. The first thing out of his mouth was, “Just so you know, you’re being recorded.” I didn’t know what was going on. Michael then started asking questions about Christopher Brooks and Claudio Sylvestri who was the former CEO of Compaq Computer and Business Objects. I just sat there in stunned silence. Michael then said he had cameras installed throughout his (mom’s) house, had been recording my conversations, and “knew everything” as if he was piecing together a conspiracy. Christopher had shared with me a lot of private stories about Claudio, who was one of his good friends, on the phone and we always talked about the contractors and employees at Business Objects so I became really worried that Michael was going to do something stupid like fire off a bunch of embarrassing emails to my client, just for the hell of it.

Then Michael made it a point to tell me that one of his spy cameras was located in a plastic owl that sat on the doorstep of his house and I remembered a conversation I’d had with Christopher while sitting on the doorstep. We’d been talking about taking a trip together to Mexico after the project. At that point I realized what the “big secret” was that Michael and his friends were holding against me (in addition to a few Claudio/Christopher Vegas stories).

Michael thought Christopher was a full-time employee of Business Objects when he was actually a consultant working Corp-to-Corp through his own consulting company. Christopher’s company and my company were solution provider partners in the project which meant there was nothing wrong with hanging out together if we wanted to.

The fact Christopher and I were such good friends really bothered Michael so he was trying to make me think that he had me over a barrel because of the conversations he had taped. I was just completely flabbergasted but didn’t feel the need to explain the details of my business to a sicko jackass who was spying on me and just said, “Michael, just know that there’s nothing illegal going on,” and walked out of his house.

When I walked outside, his friend Curtis approached me and said while rubbing his fingers together, “If you give us a little some some (meaning money), I’ll tell you what’s going on.” I didn’t have anything to worry about legally so I just left and moved back to Denver a few months later. The whole experience was absolutely surreal but I had a business to protect so I stayed calm and just walked away.

Ramola D: So now you were running your second company Watermill Consulting in Denver. What happened next?

Chris Burton: Things were fine in Denver for a couple months until one day I learned that my company was being investigated! Someone had sent an anonymous tip to a manager at Business Objects claiming Christopher and I had an “improper relationship.” This accusation was quashed after Business Objects’ own legal, internal audit, and security groups found nothing improper had taken place. It turned out that an unhappy contractor provided the tip but I still don’t know the actual details behind the allegation, how deep it went, or if Michael Raines was involved. After the investigation closed, the contractor was fired and Christopher and I kept the project, so I thought everything was behind me until Voice to Skull started a week later.

Somewhere between 2004 and 2005 I was put onto a targeted individual list. Maybe Michael had been busted again for selling drugs and was making up an accusation against me to escape prosecution. Or maybe it had something to do with my ex-partners’ failed real estate project. The file left out on the floor at my office, the interrogation and shakedown at Michael’s house, and the anonymous tip and investigation of my company clearly indicate to me that something had been going on in California that was connected to Voice to Skull.

Ramola D: Can you describe the first instance of Voice to Skullthat you can recall? How did this start happening?

Chris Burton: So, a week after the investigation ended, Voice to Skull began at my loft. I was sitting in my office alone when, out of nowhere, I began hearing a man and woman talking about me. The man and woman, who both sounded like mature adults in their 40s or 50s, were talking about the recent investigation.

Reported V2K Transmissions

The man said, “It looks like Chris has been cleared and is receiving more (job) requisitions,”and the woman replied, “Well I’m glad everything worked out… What do you think is going to happen now?”

When these conversations began I knew immediately it was a live conversation between two people. It was unmistakable. It was as if someone just turned on a speaker and started broadcasting two people’s conversations into my loft. My place was a top floor corner unit with concrete floors and ½ double-walled drywall separating my unit from my neighbor’s so it was absolutely baffling to me how it was being done.

I thought it was a prank at first but the two of them just continued talking all day long and then started up again about five minutes after I got up the next morning. I suspected my downstairs neighbors were playing a joke on me but after the conversations continued for a week straight, I realized it was much more than just a practical joke. The sound was impossible to localize or shield against which created the most insanely unfair advantage a person could ever have over another.

This was the beginning of what I call treatments. Treatments are scenarios or storylines built up verbally by the Voice to Skullers over time, like an old radio show, or soap opera, that are carefully crafted to lead you into believing whatever they tell you. They take time to establish and are incredibly well-scripted.

Ramola D: Echoes there with the classic screenwriting use of “treatments,” which spell out storyline.

Chris Burton: The dialog is mostly improvised but the storylines deepen every day, as if there’s a team of writers working non-stop to develop new plot twists. Every day more and more pages are added to the manuscript which, like a soap opera, always stays consistent with what was written the day before, and the day before that, and the day before that. You could wake up and have completely forgotten about what was said the night before and the Voice to Skullers will pick up right where they left off.

Treatments are always designed to build up your hope for a potential release over a period of time, only to destroy it (usually traumatically). It’s as if Orson Wells and Joseph Mengele got together every single day for years to psychologically torment a blind person in their custody who’s desperate to be released. I’ll talk a lot more about treatments throughout the interview because they make up a great deal of the torture and are KEY to understanding the differences between Voice to Skull torture and a mental illness like AVH (Audio Verbal Hallucinations) or schizophrenia.

After a few days, the non-stop conversations between the man and the woman began to include two other males. Now all four of them were talking about me all day long. These are what the Voice to Skullers referred to as “mirrored conversations.” For the first few days, the mirrored conversations made me think my neighbors were involved, but as they continued I understood clearly that they were using this technique of speaking as an interrogation tool. When someone is speaking to someone else about you, you tend to spill your guts in an attempt to clarify whatever questions they have. After a few weeks, I started speaking back to the group out loud, and I knew they could hear me because their conversations would start to include information I had just spoken out loud.

The Voice to Skullers, over the next seven years, used non-stop mirrored conversations, 16 hours/day, to draw out every last detail about my life (my stories, information about my friends and family, everything), which they used to build a schematic of my life. Seven years later they stopped the mirrored conversations and began speaking to me directly. This schematic, also called omniscience or hyper game theory, allowed them to always stay a step ahead and create more and more personalized treatments (storylines) having to do with what Voice to Skull is, why I was in the program, who was involved, when I would be released, and more.

Treatments are meticulously designed to take advantage of what you “think” is going on while never revealing the full capability of the underlying technology which can imitate people’s voices perfectly, hear what you’re hearing, and see what you’re seeing (all of which CIA Whistleblower Robert Duncan confirms in his YouTube interviews).

Here’s an example of a very short, two-day treatment and its traumatic ending, that would have taken place in the first few months of Voice to Skull. Pay attention to the pattern which always starts with unrelenting torture (for long periods of time), a pivot (in the way you’re being treated), the creation of trust between the victim and the torturer, the build-up of hope in the victim (that they’ll be released), the establishment of believability in the victim that a release is imminent, and finally the traumatic crash that instantly snaps the victim back to their hopeless reality. Jeffrey Dahmer, Ariel Castro, and other notorious psychopaths played the same mind games with their victims.

Reported V2K Transmissions

The torturers might have kept you up all night long the day before explaining how your life was sacrificed for America’s ambitions to develop electromagnetic weapons.

They go on about their limitless budgets and how deep their ties are in the government and how truly insignificant you and all your professional accomplishments are to them.

They tell you they’re professional torturers and don’t give a shit who you are. They’re here to do a job which is to torture you.

During a previous interrogation you admitted to drinking and driving so they tell you that people who drink and drive are scum and that you deserve to be tortured.

And just like someone in a powerful position, or a drunk person, can spout non-stop for hours at a time, the Voice to Skullers can go on for hours about you (or just about any topic).

They trade off talking in a mirrored conversation like malevolent prison guards establishing their power and shooting the shit.

But the next day, a Voice to Skuller brings up something about you they like. You’ve been through countless treatments before and know they always end badly so you take the compliment with a grain of salt but your brain remembers it, and because you’re electronically “binded” to their conversations you have to just sit there and listen.

Now, one of them brings up some vague reference to that “thing” you did that put you into Voice to Skull and you wonder what it was.

You explain to them that you’ve never hurt a fly in your life and have no criminal record and re-tell elements of your life story that backs this up.

They continue talking but now in a more placid tone. Over a period of 12 hours they’ve moved from hatred to somewhat sympathetic and then say, “You know, we’ve been maniacs. We shouldn’t be doing this to Chris.”

Then another Voice to Skuller chimes in and says, “You know it’s hard doing this. I’m not even mad at Chris.”

You notice this slight shift in their attitude and you start to think that maybe they’re thinking more critically about the program.

Their arrogance declines a bit and they start talking more like “buddies” of yours saying things like, “This program is just a piece of shit man. None of us wants to be here.”

This makes you loosen up and you might say something funny and they laugh with you.

This more reassuring tone continues as they talk about some of your funny stories, or brag about your baseball playing days in high school, and then one of them says, “Something big is actually happening behind the scenes that is going to save Chris!”

They’ve been talking positively for hours (days or even weeks in longer treatments), so now you actually start feeling confident that the torture might end!

And then all of a sudden, out of nowhere, they say something like, “Chris, you know how we’re going to help you get out of this? We’re going to $#%@ing bash your head in with a sledgehammer and kill your $#%*ing sister tonight you stupid $*#K!”

That’s usually how treatments end. It’s like trying to climb out of a well and then being abruptly snapped back to the bottom where you have to start the climb all over again.

One time, they spent months building up the character of a woman Voice to Skuller named Doreen who was “new” to the program. She would come online usually after 5:00 pm with two other male Voice to Skullers. She was nice sounding, spoke very articulately and seemed to have a fresh perspective on things as if she was new to the entire Voice to Skull project (maybe a psychologist or researcher).

She stayed on the sidelines for the first few weeks while they threatened to kick my ass when I went out with my friends, lobbed insults, and kept me up all night talking, but after about a month she started to speak her mind and expressed more and more doubts about the purpose of the program. She had the same authority as the other Voice to Skullers so when she got angry at them, they had to listen. After a few weeks of this, whenever I heard her voice, I actually started to feel relief because the other Voice to Skullers would stop torturing me when she was in the room. (At the time I thought the Voice to Skullers were all in the same room.)

After about two months, she would always say things like, “Chris just needs to hang in there a little while longer. This program is full of assholes and there’s NO WAY they’re EVER going to get away with this…” After two months of getting to know her I felt confident that she was my champion in the program, but one day, out of absolutely nowhere, she said “Getting out of this is going to be easy for Chris… Once we slit his F#$king stomach open and watch his guts fall out, he’s out!” Then one of the male Voice to Skullers said, “Doreen, get over here, get down on your knees and suck my D#*K.” And she replied, “I’d rather F##K the S##T out of you!” And that was it. After more than two months of building up goodwill and a rapport with Doreen my hopes for release were dashed and I realized I was a prisoner in a deeply demented cult of some kind.

They tortured me for weeks after that but then started building me up again saying things like, “Chris, we picked you because we thought you would be tough. If we didn’t think you could handle this, you wouldn’t be here.”

This, of course, along with technology involved makes you think you have to hang in there, and that Voice to Skull isn’t a cult, it’s a massive psychology experiment that hand-picked you for your “toughness,” and the cycle begins again.

Another long-term treatment I experienced had to do with John Hickenlooper (Ed Note: Two-term Mayor of Denver, now Governor of Colorado) being suspected of putting me into Voice to Skull. John lived a block away from me in downtown Denver. For sevenmonths, the Voice to Skullers kept up with this treatment which played out on a week-to-week basis. It wasn’t the only thing they talked about, it was just layered in with about eight other ongoing treatments mostly having to do with the police and a number of my friends being involved.

The treatment played out like this:

Reported V2K Transmissions

Voice to Skull is of course a super-secret govt program that I’m trapped in but many of my friends were supposedly brought in to help me and they want answers.

The Voice to Skullers don’t know how I was put into the program but they also want to help me.

They suspect John might have “put me in” because one night I blasted my stereo with the windows open which pissed him off.

I’m told that someone from the program asked John about his involvement and he refused to answer their questions.

A couple weeks later Voice to Skull tells me that John (who was the Mayor at the time) is being pressured to answer questions from the State Department about whether or not he put me into the program.

The torturers continued talking non-stop and constantly reminded me of how serious my situation was (telling me that this is a program they put terrorists in), but every once in a while, they would interject something about the John situation.

This went on for months until one day they said John acquiesced and a date had been set on which he would have to answer the State Department’s questions.

The day of the “inquiry” they projected a picture in my mind of Hickenlooper sitting at a desk (with a mic) on the stage of an auditorium. He was sitting on one side of the stage and the State Department officials were sitting behind a desk (with a mic) on the other side. They showed a few snap shots of a large audience seated in an auditorium and other snap shots of people I knew sitting together (in the audience). The pictures were colorless (the way images are in your head) and none of them showed John, the State Department officials, and the audience together in one shot.

The “inquiry” proceedings were communicated to me through Voice to Skull live and mimicked Hickenlooper’s voice perfectly as he sort of dodged and weaved his way around the questions like Bill Clinton. I listened to it while I was at home working and took a couple of business calls.

When I hung up the show was still going on, live, I just missed some questions that had been asked. It was perfectly scripted with dozens of characters (each with a unique voice) that played their roles perfectly through the entire inquiry.

John never provided any concrete information about his involvement to the panel from the “State Department” so the treatment just kept evolving into something else the next day having to do with the Denver Police and FBI being involved.

As the years went by, the treatments became longer and more complex, and grandiose, because what they were saying was always so hard to believe.

By the end of Year One they had convinced me that my neighbors were involved.

By Year Two they made me think my high school friends, and their friends, were involved.

In Year Three they made me believe some of the executive directors from the charities I worked with were involved.

By the fourth year they said John Hickenlooper, the Denver Police, and the FBI had put me into the program.

By the fifth year they said an old lonely reclusive billionaire was funding the torture because he wanted to give his money away to someone who had “been through hell.”

By Year Six they said my uncle, Vera Gowlland-Debbas, the ACLU, and UN were involved.

By Year Seven they said the US Navy and Susan Rice were helping me.

In Year Eight celebrities and heads of industry Larry Ellison, Trey Parker, Ben Affleck and Matt Damon had joined in.

By Year Nine my former employers CompuCom Systems and Aerotek, along with Yahoo (which was a client of mine) were lobbying to have me released.

And by Year Twelve, when I was living in East Palo Alto, President Obama, Marissa Mayer, Elon Musk, Mark Zuckerberg and half of Hollywood and Washington had all come together to stop Voice to Skull. This was when they introduced bio-robotization technology that could move my body parts. That treatment, which I’ll describe later, was so dramatic that it ended with me having to be airlifted to the hospital where I spent an entire month recovering. I’ll talk about that later.

Ramola D: So these are highly elaborate treatments, referring to people you know, as well as public figures and celebrities, that seem to be highly structured and constantly put you through an emotional wringer, building you up and letting you down—as if a military or CIA psychologist working amorally on torture techniques had invented them.

Chris Burton: I’ve been through many hundreds of treatments like this involving all sorts of characters supposedly becoming involved in order to help me and all of them ended with an emotional thud. If I had a distant relationship to someone through friends or family, like celebrities or CEOs, they were included. Every storyline was built on the previous one in a highly organized way that would require a full-time project manager to keep track of.

Anybody you know could be built up as an “insider” who signed a non-disclosure agreement making it impossible for them to talk about it. And because the technology is so incredible, and electromagnetic weapons are so important, you’ll believe almost anyone could be participating.

It wasn’t until a few years into my torture that I discovered just how closely their treatments resembled the psychological torture and enhanced interrogation techniques perfected by Russian and US intelligence services. These techniques guided their daily conversations which were, again, all intended to build up stress and anxiety in the victim and lead them to believe they’d soon be released.

Ramola D: Thank you for drawing my attention to the undeniable commonalities between classic KGB Communist Russian torture techniques, the CIA’s 1963 KUBARK Counter-Intelligence manual of torture, the CIA’s 1983 HRETM (Human Resource Exploitation Training Manual) torture techniques, Rumsfeld’s Working Group’s SERE-based Guantanamo psychological torture techniques, and these V2K torture techniques, which you have spelled out in the Torture Techniques document you sent me, along with your answers here to this interview. (Ed Note: Please see the Torture Techniques Document linked here, under Related, below.)

Chris Burton: The Russian, KUBARK, HRETM and Working Group (Rumsfeld) psychological torture techniques used to build up my treatments included the following:

monopolization of attention, cultivation of anxiety and despair, alternating punishments and rewards, demonstrating omniscience and omnipotence, use of scenarios, denial of privacy, insults, threats, sensory disorientation, emotional love, emotional hate, fear (revved) up harsh, fear up mild, reduced fear, pride and ego up, pride and ego down, futility, establish your identity, repetition approach, file and dossier (convincing the detainee that the interrogator has a damning and inaccurate file that must be fixed), Mutt and Jeff (a team consisting of a friendly and harsh interrogator), rapid fire questioning, sleep adjustment and deprivation, false flag, threat of transfer, isolation, prolonged interrogations and many more that are not documented.

You can find the definitions of these classic CIA Torture techniques on the Internet.

Today, after experiencing just about everything Voice to Skull technology can do, I realize they had been surveilling me back in 2005 by accessing my brain’s evoked potentials, which allows them to listen through my ears and see through my eyes, but they never revealed those capabilities until much later.

By not revealing those capabilities, and just transmitting voices, they were able to make me think all sorts of things were happening that weren’t. For example, they only spoke to me in my loft and car for three years, which made me believe my house and vehicle had cameras and transmitters installed in them. And by commenting on what I was seeing on my computer screen they made me think I was constantly being hacked. None of this was true.

This graduated revealing of their technologies which includes conversations, then voice transformation, then injections of emotions (emotional signal clustering), then lie detection, then forced speech, then hive mind telepathy, then bio-robotization (heterodyning) et al. allows them to create elaborate treatments but it also establishes a timeline of “experiences” that I believe reveals a distinct pattern or signature that’s completely unique to all Voice to Skull victims. Journalists, lawyers and mental health experts, take note.

Ramola D: Would you like to address this distinctive pattern further, which separates Voice to Skull Torture from what psychiatrists call paranoid delusional systems, audio-visual hallucinations, schizophrenia, and schizoid disorders?

Chris Burton: Yes, let me interject with something very important here regarding treatments and this signature pattern of experiences. We’re all familiar with Dr. Lorraine Sheridan and her group-stalking “study” which concludes that people who claim to have been group-stalked, or Voice to Skulled, are most likely delusional.

The basis of her study was an online survey which asked respondents questions that were taken from a PTSD (Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder) questionnaire that basically crossed out the word PTSD and replaced it with “group-stalking.” The questions Sheridan published asked respondents how their condition made them feel, as opposed to being investigatory in nature–as if it was already a foregone conclusion that group-stalking was a mental illness. Sheridan actually cites one of her own papers in the study which suggests group-stalking is “indicative of paranoid delusional systems” which underscores her bias. There are absolutely no references in her survey to the actual conversations people were having with their torturers. This is akin to asking the diplomats in Cuba to explain their feelings, not their symptoms.

Voice to Skull torturers follow a very strict protocol that protects their anonymity while they’re constantly building up treatments. If this protocol and the survey respondents’ description of their treatments were addressed in Dr. Sheridan’s questionnaire, it would have provided a huge amount of insight into the Voice to Skull claims being made by a good number of gang-stalking victims.

It’s apparent from the very beginning when you’re Voice to Skulled that the conversations are coming from human beings because the torturers are always revealing personality traits unwittingly. They use different grammar and diction than you do. Some might speak by pairing prepositions with the word “which” all the time, like an academic, when you (I) don’t. They might make mistakes commenting about the law or historical information (that you happen to know). They might crack up laughing at something funny you said or at the absurdity of the situation. They might even break down and cry as they’re recalling all of the horrible things they’ve put you through.

Torturers never tell you what they look like, or where they grew up, where they went to dinner last night, what their favorite food is, what kind of car they drive, what they do for fun, how many kids they have, what kind of books or movies they like, what nationality they are, and the list goes on and on and on. They speak non-stop, 16+ hours a day, year after year, discussing minute details about your friends, family, and others they claim are involved, but they never break the protocol which protects their anonymity, as if they know what they’re saying is being recorded. Nothing that could triangulate the identity of a torturer is ever mentioned out loud.

Torturers have to concentrate extremely hard in order to create sentences that abide by their protocol. And having to speak so much eventually breaks down their act. This, and the Emmy-winning writing that goes into the treatments, which just picks right up from where it left off the day before, is why real victims of Voice to Skull just roll their eyes when they read books about schizophrenia, bi-polar or delusional disorder.

The conversations that Voice to Skull victims are hearing are completely different. And unlike the 300 million people with AVH and the 1/100 with schizophrenia, Voice to Skull victims report the unique experience of people speaking through their mouths and moving their body parts! Talk about a pattern of “symptoms” that’s completely unique to Voice to Skull.

Ramola D: It’s clear there’s more to this torture than just “voices in heads” pulsed in using military EMF neurotechnology—let’s explore that further shortly.

To return to your early experience, I understand you were bullied by these Voice to Skullers to actually close your successful IT company.

Chris Burton: After about half a year into my torture, I realized I was in big, big trouble. Once they knew I was really scared they told me, in a very calm manner, that they were going to kill me if I didn’t stop working in the IT consulting industry. I was afraid for my life and had no choice but to close down Watermill. They also threatened my sister’s life a week later describing where she had parked that evening. Now, 13 years later, after experiencing so many hundreds of treatments, I regret my decision to close my business and destroy my IT consulting career but at the time it was the only decision I could have made. The technology and treatments are so scary that you can’t take any chances! All a Voice to Skuller needs to do is tell you what color your little girl’s dress is that day and you’ll quit your job, change your testimony, leave the country, or potentially hurt yourself. They have that kind of power.

Ramola D: So this neuroweapon system, by way of its intimidating voice-in-head technology and psychological CIA-Torture techniques is being used as an insidious Social Engineering tool—to effect destructive actions like shutting down a successful career with overt and implied death threats.

Chris Burton: There are three deaths connected to specific treatments they put me through (which are described in my YouTube testimony). Two people died only days after being mentioned on Voice to Skull and my cousin’s mother in law, Vera Gowlland-Debbas, the International Law School Professor, came down with cancer and died eight months after I contacted her and went public on Facebook in 2014.

Ramola D: Are you saying this Voice to Skull program then is connected to a powerful Black Ops organized crime network that doesn’t think twice about committing murders–that people whose names are mentioned by Voice to Skull are being targeted for death?

Chris Burton: Clearly there are no rules of any kind in place for these programs and because there are so many compartmentalized entities taking part in the research, there’s no telling how many personal or political grudges are being settled in these experiments. They’re doing everything they can to protect their anonymity which gives them a license to torture people to suicide and weave into treatments anything they like.

My YouTube testimony goes into the deaths related to my torture pretty deeply. One of the deaths, the most recent one, which happened in January was so traumatizing I thought it had been faked. I just couldn’t believe it happened. Voice to Skull imitated a very good friend of mine for a couple hours one night and he died of a seizure a few days later. This was the very first time they had ever spoken of or imitated this person. His name is David Scott.

Another death, Karen Quintana, who died of an aneurysm in 2014, occurred two days after Voice to Skull spent four hours scolding me about my friendship with her son-in-law. I had just met her a couple weeks before. After that happened I packed my bags and moved to SE Asia to go public about her death and write a book about my experiences with Voice to Skull.

Vera’s death was another traumatic loss that created terrible confusion and anger in me. Vera Gowlland-Debbas was a world-renowned international law school professor and was Palestine’s legal advisor. When I moved to SE Asia to write about Karen’s death I notified Vera and she immediately came down with an aggressive cancer that killed her eight months later. If I had been given a chance to explain Voice to Skull to her, she would have been one of our biggest advocates.

Because these programs are classified, and therefore walled off from society and the law, news about them, if it ever comes, is twenty or more years away so intelligence agencies and researchers can remove anyone they want who’s associated with a TI with zero repercussions. It’s just like walking down the street and sticking someone you don’t like with a needle and giving them Syphilis during the Tuskegee experiments. There’s no difference.

Part 2: Synthetic Telepathy, Hive-Minds, Brain-Cloning, Emotion-Injections, Full Body Takeover – The Living Manchurian Candidate Program

Ramola D: I understand you are making a distinction between Voice to Skull and Synthetic Telepathy. How do you define the latter? What was the first instance of Synthetic Telepathy you can recall?

Chris Burton: Synthetic telepathy was introduced to me after I had lost everything. I quit Watermill and my career in IT consulting because of the death threats, and worked for seven years to build up my credibility in the charity fundraising industry as a way of both protesting the torture and proclaiming my innocence.

I thought that if I created fundraising businesses that exclaimed, “Look at me, I’m raising money for all of these schools and charities,” someone in the Voice to Skull hierarchy or chain of command would take notice and shut down my torture program, but my appeal to their humanity didn’t work and I lost my life savings and home in the process. The Voice to Skullers tortured me non-stop with treatments and other psychological torture techniques the whole time I was working on these companies.

Here are some graphics from the three charity fundraising businesses I started.

Pawscorp.com allowed customers to donate 30-100% of the profit from over 4000 pet products to one of over 200 schools and 501(c)(3)s. We worked with American Humane, Goodwill, the YMCA, the Wounded Warrior Project, Rush Soccer and many more well-known organizations.

Transitions Expo was a college and career fair for underprivileged youth that benefited The Street School Network. For-profit and state schools/community colleges were represented under one roof.

Pet Family Deals was a 50/50 partnership with the Colorado Veterinary Medical Association. It provided pet-related daily deals, similar to a Groupon for pets.

After I lost my loft to foreclosure in 2010, I moved into a friend’s house who did a lot of traveling. I was alone most of the time so the Voice to Skullers created a treatment I call the vetting sessions. They knew my cousin’s wife was an environmental lawyer for the UN and her mother, Vera, was a world renowned international law school professor who wrote the ICJ advisory opinion on the legality of the separation wall in Palestine, Legal Consequences of a Separation Wall in Occupied Palestinian Territory, so they pretended that my inclusion in the torture program was causing a huge debate within the institution(s) heading the experiments.

They put on a mock trial which vetted my character and involved a sort of defense lawyer who spoke on my behalf. They said Susan Herman and Jameel Jaffer from the ACLU were involved along with some of my cousin’s friends from LA (who were important people). Once again, this treatment required me to talk about every aspect of my life to the torturers who were pretending to be something like a secret society.

When I brought up the charity fundraising I had done, one particular Voice to Skuller I call Hoarse Voice (because his voice sounded hoarse all the time) spoke up and screamed in my defense, “Listen assholes, Chris was doing everything right and you still Voice to Skulled him!” When this happened, I could literally feel his emotion in my body. He yelled at the other Voice to Skullers for a few minutes and I noticed my hands had clenched up into fists and my lips were mouthing his words! This was the introduction of emotion injecting, body takeovers, and hive mind/synthetic telepathy.

During the vetting sessions treatment, which lasted a week, they brought up a test I had cheated on in high school which I didn’t want to talk about. When they brought it up again a few minutes later, I thought for a second about the cheating, at which point one of the Voice to Skullers exclaimed suddenly, “That’s it, we got him!” This is how they introduced mind-reading and just like all of their technology reveals, it was woven into an elaborate treatment which made me think I had a chance of being released.

It was during the vetting sessions when Voice to Skull started scolding me for being friends with Karen Quintana’s son in law. When I heard Karen passed away two days later I decided to go public and moved to Cambodia and Vietnam in 2014 to write a book about my experiences. My YouTube testimony details a lot about my torture in SE Asia.

When I moved back to the US in 2015, they revealed hive-mind/synthetic telepathy in Palo Alto and I’ve been communicating with them telepathically ever since. Before that, for ten years, I had been speaking out loud to communicate with them.

Synthetic Telepathy is the ability to communicate to the Voice to Skullers by just thinking. Today I realize that they were probably using telepathy on their end the whole time but for years I thought they were using some sort of headset with a microphone.

Ramola D: Are you saying that you think Voice to Skull–the experience of their voices sounded in your head–was actually just Synthetic Telepathy all along? Or what exactly are you saying?

Chris Burton: Yes. I think the Voice to Skullers were using Synthetic Telepathy the whole time on their end. Synthetic Telepathy and Voice to Skull sound exactly the same to the receiver. For 10 years I would talk back out loud, believing that was the only way they could hear me. They didn’t respond to my thoughts for 10 years which made me think I had to speak out loud.

By not revealing this aspect of the technology, and creating obvious “clues” like communicating with me only in my loft and car for three years, they made me think my neighbors were involved or that it was a surveillance operation being conducted by a group located somewhere in downtown Denver (using an LRAD sort of device to transmit the sound and a bug to pick up my voice). For years I would stay up late with a telescope and binoculars looking at all of the windows in downtown Denver hoping to see someone aiming a sonic device at me. This is all part of their game.

Robert Duncan says V2K is transmitted via ground based-transmitters and satellites (for redundancy) and can follow you almost anywhere on earth. He has written two books about the technology and claims they’re transmitting brain frequencies that are unique to the victim from a very long distance away. I’m sure they’re using a combination of technologies, but to the victim, as I said in the beginning, it feels like one beam that follows you around everywhere you go.

Chris Burton: Yes, both sound exactly the same to the victim. When it first starts you immediately associate it with technologies you’ve heard of, like the LRAD (Long Range Acoustic Radar), so you think in analog terms as if there’s a person speaking into a microphone. Later, however, as they reveal more and more of the technology, you learn that what you’re hearing is not your cochlear membrane being vibrated or bone conduction.

It’s a frequency that’s actually firing neurons and recreating sounds by copying the exact nerve impulses sent from your ears or eyes to your brain. Later, when they started impersonating people’s voices, I realized everything I was hearing had been digitally transformed in some way and then transmitted into my brain. When you think in digital terms the precise capabilities of this technology become apparent.

Ramola D: You mentioned being treated to a major Voice to Skull treatment in Palo Alto. Did you experience both Hive-Mind/Synthetic Telepathy and V2K at this time?

Chris Burton: In Palo Alto, they put together a massive two-week treatment in which they brought together a large team of Voice to Skullers to play the roles of President Obama, Mark Zuckerberg, Elon Musk, Marissa Mayer, Ben Affleck, Trey Parker, Dustin Hoffman, James Hetfield, Fred Armison, Kristen Wig, my sister, my cousin Joe, my dad, and two former colleagues. They imitated the voices and personalities of everyone to perfection. Some, like the Obama, Fred Armison, and Trey Parker characters spoke for hours while others, like my sister, spoke only a few words.

For two weeks straight they kept me up until 5 am in this treatment that was intended to make me believe there was an elite group of celebrities and politicians, already well acquainted with Voice to Skull and hive mind telepathy, who were taking part in a giant reveal of the technology in anticipation of letting me go. They claimed I was going to be part of the leadership team that helped determine when and where Voice to Skull would ever be used in military or the private sector, if ever. The group (I never knew exactly who was in the hive mind until they spoke) improvised elaborate skits and sang songs at night that built me up as an “insider” in their club. The skits were led by the Fred Armison, Trey Parker, and Kristin Wig characters and were performed as well as any Broadway performance. It was THAT good.

A few days into this massive treatment, they introduced Hive Mind Telepathy. The hive mind basically allows the group to suggest words while another person is speaking. It’s a lot like hearing multiple words layered together in an audio track with one coming through a little louder than the others. When more than one person thinks of the same word, the software adds weight to that word which causes it to stand out. This allows the person speaking to improvise speeches and rhymes all night long.

In order to speak in the hive you have to “think out loud,” but the hive can also read your mind and give away the entire sentence you’re about to say (if you’ve already envisioned it). I’ll talk more about that aspect of the hive a little later in the interview because it’s a functionality they mostly keep turned off because when more than one person’s entire sentence is being communicated at the same time everything becomes sort of garbled and you can’t make out what is being said.

The group had their own lingo which was made up of phrases picked out ahead of time such as “itsy bitsy teenie weenie yellow polkadot bikini” which was used instead of words like small, puny, short, etc. By using these phrases, singing songs, and rhyming sentences they created a perfect example of what hive mind “chat rooms” might look like if the technology ever became public.

Each chat room I was put into had its own “personality” (e.g. cartoonish, sensual, business-like et al.) with their own (living) rules that changed based on funny things people would say in the hive mind. For example, one of the characters, I think it was the Trey Parker, said “myself and others” instead of “me” and it caught on so everyone started using “myself and others” instead of “me” or “I” whenever they spoke.

Other times rhymes would catch on and everyone would end their sentences with something that rhymed with “balloon,” for example. The treatment went on with puppet shows (using my hands to talk to each other), masturbation “chat rooms” in which you and a “girl” would be left alone so she could take over your hand, and topic rooms where you could chat about a certain subject matter.

I could talk for hours about this experience. It was the most well scripted and well produced “show” I’ve ever witnessed and was every bit as good as any SNL performance and it went on for two weeks. (The actual skits and songs were performed at night. In the daytime the “actors” would just talk with me.)

I honestly thought I was going to be released until, of course, after two weeks of building me up, they opened the trap door and told me the real reason for the performances. I had been chipped for the purposes of experimentation and the chip, which had a small battery connected to it, and was inserted all the way into my brain stem, was running out of juice. They told me my chip’s battery had a ten-year power supply and that when it died, I would die too because it was impossible to remove or replace. They said they got everyone together and created the skits as a way of saying goodbye. They imitated my dad and sister, both of whom were too “broken up” to see me off in person??

To add to the ruse, they hit me with what I call a P wave. It’s a wave that feels like pressure is being applied to your whole body. It’s very scary and can be increased to make you think you’re dying. They started it at a one and increased it to a ten over the course of about fifteen minutes while everyone said their goodbyes. The president said I’d be buried in Arlington. When the pressure got to about a seven I could feel my organs gurgling and bubbling, which Dr. Horton called cavitation in one of her videos. I just laid down in my bed and waited for it to be over. After 15 minutes of the P wave and organ gurgling I wasn’t dead yet, so I questioned why I hadn’t died and some of them started to giggle. After this, they tortured me relentlessly for weeks which ended up putting me into the hospital for a month. I’ll talk about that later.

One additional note. During this treatment, which involved the voice of a female ex-colleague I worked with at CompuCom Systems, they revealed how they could morph a girl’s voice into a guy’s voice in mid-sentence. This is the level of voice transformation software they have and highlights the fact that everything you hear over Voice to Skull has most likely been manipulated.

Before they morphed her voice into a guy’s they had built up a treatment, over a period of four months, having to do with her being recruited into Voice to Skull to help me get through it. They built up her character over time using her exact voice and mimicked her perfectly, right down to the way she spoke (which was very quickly).

She was supposedly “monitoring” the experiment someplace with my uncle. I didn’t believe this, but then during the two-week torture in Palo Alto, she started speaking all the time, and would laugh “genuinely” at anything funny I would say while the celebrities kidded us about our “relationship.” At night, she began to take over my hand and made me masturbate. The whole situation became so intolerable that I actually called CompuCom and left a voice mail asking someone to tell her to please stop torturing me.

They had me so wrapped up in that treatment that at one point I actually texted “I love you” to her but I quickly snapped out of it, realizing just how dangerous Voice to Skull really was, and texted her right back and said I’m a Voice to Skull victim and to please call the FBI if she ever heard a voice in her head. She replied, “Please don’t ever contact me again.” This was a very important person, ex-colleague, and former client of mine so you can see the kind of damage Voice to Skull can do to personal and professional relationships when they feel like it.

Ramola D: Yes, it appears so, with this voice morphing software especially. Really, this is all absolutely extraordinary information, especially about the Broadway-show “treatment” and the way the hive-mind works, including the major takeover of your body that the constant, elaborate “chat-room” back-and-forth communication seems to facilitate. We have to discuss this further in a podcast!

Can you describe what the voices sounded like—did they sound electronic or amplified, or just like normal human voices in close range? Where exactly did they seem to be coming from?

Chris Burton: The sound is faint, as if it’s coming through a wall, but it’s perfectly intelligible. It’s different than a sound-wave which becomes muffled as soon as it travels through a door or a wall. When Voice to Skull first started I put my ear to the walls in my loft but couldn’t find a place where the sound became louder or softer.

The voices were also omnidirectional which made them impossible to localize. The sound falls somewhere between thinking “out loud” and hearing someone speaking right next to you when your ears are plugged. And you can’t filter it out the way you can with ambient noise (e.g., at a ball game or concert). You could be listening to loud music on headphones and everything they say is perfectly intelligible even though it’s faint. It literally cuts through all audible sound and your thoughts like a knife and grabs 100% of your attention.

Unless they’re hitting you with Thought Interruption or Injection, or Freezing Your Mind (which started for me in 2015), you can think clearly while the conversations are being beamed into your brain so it’s not like the “voices” are your only thoughts. Your brain is still thinking about other things, you just have this conversation going on that you can’t turn off. Another hallmark of Voice to Skull is a very high-pitched ringing (tinnitus) they transmit into your head once a week or so that usually lasts only a few seconds. Think of the sound the mortician’s camera made in Silence of the Lambs when he photographed the butterfly cocoon. It’s a super high frequency tone that, when it’s transmitted, makes you think that they’re calibrating something. I always suspected it was associated with Voice to Skull but didn’t know for sure until after year ten when they started transmitting it all the time (making it go up in pitch and down in pitch).

After eleven years of beaming only Voice to Skull voices into my head they introduced Forced Speech in Palo Alto. One day they just surprised me and said, “Hi Chris, this is Joe!” and it was my cousin Joe’s voice coming through my mouth. This means they can control your breathing, tongue, larynx and vocal chords. They can also cause your vocal chords to expand/relax and make you speak much lower than your normal voice. They can impersonate voices through you, like my cousin’s, and send heavily synthesized voices through you too. They never sent a woman’s voice through me but they did a good very good James Hatfield impersonation.

Ramola D: So that is a level of neuro-assault and takeover that is well beyond piping voices into heads via Voice to Skull—others report Forced Speech too. Did you understand by that point you were being assaulted with Black Ops military-grade neural weapons? What did you think was happening? How did you react?

Chris Burton: When I lived in my loft in Denver I thought the conversations were being transmitted from one of the units across the alley or from the parking garage a few hundred feet away. You can see how exposed my unit was in these pictures.

As I said earlier, for years they only Voice to Skulled me in my loft and in my car which made me think my neighbors were involved. When they started Voice to Skulling me everywhere I went in Denver, I realized it was something much bigger, possibly incorporating cell tower sites or even satellites. When the torture followed me to Cambodia and Vietnam I was convinced it was military technology.

The torturers are also professionally trained and very intelligent people so when you add up the expenses in just my torture den alone you’re talking about four or more people being paid at least 100K (or more) for 13 years which is over $5 million in torture labor alone. Add to that the people who don’t speak (developers and other team members) and the equipment (ground-based transmitters and/or satellites etc.), and you’re talking about a massive budget for something that no investor will ever be able to go public with. It can only be a massive classified Military/Intelligence project with subcontractors, or a private entity that’s selling the technology piece by piece to the military (both of which bypass the Common Rule which governs federally-funded experimentation on humans).

As I explained to you over the phone, this tech can take over your entire mind and nervous system to the degree that you literally become a back-seat passenger in your own body. The Hive-Mind Telepathy and Forced Speech was startling when they introduced it in Palo Alto but that was after they revealed the beginnings of the Bio-Robotization which was extremely scary. I had been tortured for 10 years straight with just voices and then out of nowhere one day they hit me with pulsed waves that violently shook individual parts of my body, one at a time.

One day, in Palo Alto, I was driving, and they told me to stop the car because they wanted to “test some waves” on me. I pulled over and they said, “Okay here’s wave number one” and immediately my left hand started moving side to side really fast, about 3-4 times per second. After shaking my hand for about five minutes, they said, “Okay, here’s the second wave,” and hit me with a frequency that made my entire left arm, from the elbow to the tip of my fingers, start whacking my chest over and over.

After five minutes of that, they announced, “Now we’re going to try out the gas-pedal wave,” and my right foot began depressing the gas pedal about 20 times. Finally, they said, “Okay, here’s the last wave” and, all of a sudden, my entire torso began thrusting itself against the steering wheel over and over for about 15 minutes. I thought they were killing me off at this point so I dried my tears, lit a cigarette, and just waited for the end.

Ramola D: That just sounds criminal. Essentially each time, it was a wave of powerful frequency or directed energy sent directly to distinct body parts—first your hand, then your entire arm, then your leg, and finally your torso—this was not neural influence or frequency sent to your brain?

Chris Burton: It was a neural frequency sent to my brain which actually had the capability of controlling all of my body parts but I didn’t know that. Up that point, I had thought Voice to Skull was just a number of individual frequencies that could send voices, influence your emotions, disrupt your mind and give an indication of whether or not you were telling the truth. Just those capabilities seemed out of this world to me.

The waves that moved my body parts in the car were pulsed so it made me think they were testing new frequencies that had particular attributes (one can shake your hand, one can shake your arm etc.).

When they revealed Forced Speech, moved my hands for the puppet shows, and took over my hand in the masturbation “chat rooms” I began to realize the technology could affect every part of my brain and nervous system. A year later they actually took over 100% of my body in a hotel room in Mexico and walked me around like a marionette! They had total control. I couldn’t move a muscle or even think for myself. They’re very good at revealing the technology in graduated steps and weaving them into your treatments (to maximize the torture). You’re always thinking to yourself, “I can’t believe they can do this” but later they show you even more.

Ramola D: And that’s the crux, isn’t it, of the CIA’s long-studied, secretive MK ULTRA intentions, as reported by John Marks and others–to create fully-controllable “assets” or spies or assassins: the Manchurian Candidate Project.

During this time period, were you experiencing other aspects that others being targeted covertly with EMF/sonic/neuro weapons have reported, such as stalking, or being hit physically with DEWs (Directed Energy Weapons)?

Chris Burton: I talked about what Michael Raines did to me in Half Moon Bay, which I think could be described as gang-stalking. But in Palo Alto, one night, they actually sent someone over to talk to me who was wearing a Manchurian Candidate Project sweatshirt.

I was sitting under the canopy at a bus stop to wait out a rainstorm, near the house where I was renting a room, and was approached by a guy I had met the week before at the same bus stop. When he got closer, one of the Voice to Skullers said, “Hey, look there’s Greg, he’s not so tough looking…” and without me saying a thing, the guy, Greg, started laughing hysterically.

Voice to Skull then remarked, “You see Chris, Greg is a friend of ours, we know people everywhere.” Greg just continued laughing and nodded his head and that’s when I looked down at his sweatshirt and couldn’t believe what I saw. It had “The Manchurian Candidate Project” embroidered on the top left chest area in red and black lettering. Greg showed me a music video on his cell phone and then got up to walk to another bus station and I just let him walk away. I honestly thought this meeting meant Voice to Skull was about to end, but it didn’t.

Of course, now I regret not stopping Greg and getting his information but Voice to Skull knows what it’s doing. They knew I didn’t have my cell phone with me and couldn’t take his picture. He (Greg) had told me the week before that he was on parole so I’m sure I could identify his mugshot (he looked like Michael Irving), but what police officer is going to believe my story.

Regarding DEWs, the torturers like to shock me unexpectedly when I’m just laying around but I wouldn’t call that being shot with electromagnetic bullets the way Dr. Horton describes it. They’re just transmitting the sensation of being shocked. They can also do this with itches and some aches and pains. I did notice that my abdomen was very warm to the touch one night when I was walking down the street in Mexico, which my Voice to Skullers took credit for.

Ramola D: Which could suggest some sort of DEWs maybe—perhaps not Pulsed Energy Projectiles (a US Navy-described weapon) as Dr. Horton describes, but remote electro-shocks like Taser hits and possibly microwave weapons.

Chris Burton: The torturers did display a technology in Palo Alto that I’m honestly afraid to talk about out of fear that I won’t be believed. I’ll touch on it a little because it is 100% true and maybe someone else has experienced the same thing.

When I walked around Palo Alto one night the torturers told me to pick a carnation that was growing on a hedge and hold it in the palm of my hand. The weather was perfect and there was no wind. Without me doing anything, the carnation rolled right off of my hand and onto the street. I picked it up and put it back on my palm, which I made as flat as possible, and it rolled right off again. It was late at night and nobody was on the street, of course, so I asked the Voice to Skullers to demonstrate it on me while I stood in the middle of the street hoping someone from an office or house would see me. Voice to Skull didn’t care and demonstrated the effect about 25 times. The carnation was literally pushed right off of my hand every time.

They also demonstrated this effect with a chicken wing a few days later, so they can push things that are heavier than carnations. Incidentally, that night was also the first time they took over my hand. I was eating at a Kabab place and they began spinning a fork I was holding in my right hand. When all of this technology is being displayed, and they’re talking through your own mouth, you tend to believe that they’re leading up to something big (like the end of the program) but it never comes.

Ramola D: Did you mention to anyone what was going on—and what happened when you spoke to your friend about it?

Chris Burton: When Voice to Skull first started I tried to tell my childhood best friend about it when he came over to my loft to hang out one night. I asked him to listen as hard as he could for the voices but he said he couldn’t hear anything. This was before the Voice to Skullers threatened my life so I talked back to them like a tough guy, honestly believing my friend believed me, and said something like, “You assholes, you think you’re bad asses don’t you?”

After an hour or so of explaining to my friend that these people were harassing me, he got up to leave saying he had to call his wife. He was gone for an hour and then returned with two Denver police officers. When I opened the door, my friend was crying and said, “I’ve known you for 23 years and I’ve never heard you talk to yourself.”

That’s when one of the officers told me, “You can come with us voluntarily or we can hog-tie you and carry you out.” I couldn’t believe he had me removed from my own house. He never seemed worried or agitated. He just sat there quietly when I was talking back to the Voice to Skullers.

Ramola D: Why do you think your own friend, who had known you for years, would call the police on you—this does not even sound normal. Had you said anything that might justify his action? Is it possible this friend had all along been a covert operative of sorts? (We are after all living in the age of non-stop Covert Ops and trillion-dollar Black Budgets.)

Chris Burton: My friend, Jason Coulter, was an MP (Military Police) in the Air Force which leads me to believe that he might have been involved. He claimed once to have seen the CIA fly dead US soldiers out of Panama and always said he was skeptical of the government, but if this was pitched as “the most important science experiment known to man,” or however it’s put to perpetrators, he’d probably buy in.

I’m his son’s godfather which makes his potential involvement all the more painful.

After he called the police, he told my sister and my parents, so pretty soon everyone in my family and friendship circle knew what had happened and started to patronize me. Because of this I spent the next seven years working on my charity fundraising companies in absolute silence about Voice to Skull in hopes of building back my credibility.

When I moved to Cambodia and went public on Facebook everyone just attributed my Facebook post to the episode in my loft. One of my best friends started telling people I had gone “bat shit crazy.” I think most of us have faced this sort of thing. You could be the most stable or accomplished or educated person in your group of friends but the second you bring up this technology you instantly become a pariah.

Ramola D: What happened afterward—was a psychiatrist involved, how did your family react?

Chris Burton: My sister came to my loft a week later and recommended I see a psychiatrist she had found. I told her absolutely not, I wasn’t going to see any doctors. I said point blank that I’m hearing living breathing people talking to me through some sort of ultrasound device and wasn’t interested in arguing with her.

That’s when Voice to Skull jumped in and said, “Chris, if you don’t see the psychiatrist we are going to kill your sister.” The very next words out of my mouth were, “Okay, I’ll go see the psychiatrist.” The death threats against me and my sister flipped my world upside down.

When something like that happens, you realize instantly that you’re on an island and nobody is going to help you. I told the psychiatrist that I never heard any voices in my head and must have been overhearing one of the neighbors outside on their balcony, but she didn’t buy it. Once an intelligent person (like my sister) crafts a narrative to a doctor about someone being mentally ill, or worse, potentially anosognostic, they and the doctor bond and the situation mutates into this altruistic mission to never let the “illness” win.

There’s nothing worse than the doggedness of an uninformed person. I simply complained about someone speaking to me through a sonic device, but because the US classified the technology it sounds to the uninformed like an alien abduction.

Ramola D: You have a highly educated family, I understand. Were they educated about ongoing military testing with electronic weapons—such as microwave weapons and neuroweapons?

Chris Burton: Graduation Photograph

Chris Burton: Absolutely not. My dad, who’s a retired geologist, and my uncle are former Naval officers and neither one of them will have a conversation with me about electromagnetic weapons or neuroweapons. What really upsets me is that my uncle, John Coggi, who’s retired now, went to MIT (Massachusetts Institute of Technology) and was the launch commander of the Milstar program (Milstar is a telecommunications satellite array), and is an expert in geosynchronous orbits.

When I went public in 2014 on Facebook, I wrote to him and explained that I had been tortured for the last ten years with Voice to Skull and that all of my fundraising work (over the last seven years) had been pursued to build up my credibility and protest the torture. At first, he sounded supportive and told me to go to the Physics department at the University of Colorado and check to see if any damage had been done to my body. As it turned out, however, he and my dad were working together to lure me back to the U.S. so they could lock me up involuntarily.

When I asked him what he knew about microwave weapons, he told me a person would need two PhDs to understand what waves can do and that a lot of countries are working on various wave technologies. He said that he was part of a team that discovered a wave that could penetrate the ocean 2000 feet to deliver messages to submarines but that he really didn’t know much about where the technology was today.

His son works for the Aerospace Corporation and won a very prestigious award for architecting a database that tracks all of the military’s satellites and he hasn’t said a word to me either. I think about them possibly putting me into this program all the time but just can’t allow myself to believe it. During the SNL skits in Palo Alto the torturers constantly weaved my uncle John, my other uncle Vince (who was the past president of the Los Angeles County Medical Association), and Vera Gowlland-Debbas into the treatment as if they were involved.

Ramola D: I understand you started traveling. Did the V2K follow you? Were you able to shield at all from these neuro-assaults?

Chris Burton: As I mentioned, the Voice to Skullers only spoke to me in my loft and car for three years which made me think it was being done by my neighbors, an intelligence agency using a surveillance van/truck, or gang stalkers who would follow me around. After about three years they began communicating with me every place I went in Denver.

View from Bokor

I moved to Cambodia in 2014 to write a book about the torture and the torture followed me there. I bought a bunch of books to read on my Kindle related to torture, Cambodia, the Vietnam war, and bullying, and occasionally would share interesting passages with the Voice to Skullers in my hotel room in Phnom Penh which would prompt long conversations.

My hotel was a couple blocks away from the Russian Embassy so the torture used that as an excuse to insert a new character, Vladimir Putin, into my treatments. Whenever I stepped into the bathroom, “Vladimir” would speak to me about the Cold War. He said my uncle John was a “person of interest” to the KGB back in the ’70s and ’80s (laughing). This Vladimir spoke perfect English so it wasn’t a very good imitation.

When I moved to Sihanoukville in southern Cambodia the torture went with me and built up an entire treatment about George Bush and Michelle Obama taking an interest in my case. When I rented a motorcycle and rode to Kompot and Bokor Mountain through some rural parts of southern Cambodia, the Voice to Skull talked to me the whole time.

Their voices were perfectly clear. They were commenting on every lane change I made hoping I’d believe that their “intelligence agency” was in contact with Hun Sen and his “daughter” who wanted to ride with me.

The voices were perfectly clear in Ho Chi Minh City and Hanoi (and on the train from Ho Chi Minh to Hanoi). And when my uncle and dad convinced me to come back to the USA the Voice to Skullers told me on the airplane, “Chris thinks he’s coming back to Vietnam” which didn’t make any sense at the time because I had a girlfriend in Vietnam and had left half of my things there. When my dad had me locked up for the psych evaluation I realized what they meant. Fortunately, I was released after 13 days and I went back to Vietnam (with a delusional diagnosis).

Ramola D: Through this time, do you think the V2K–or the AI administering the V2K via cloned and recorded voices—was communicating with you in real time or did it sound like a recording? You’ve mentioned EEG or brain cloning, which ex-CIA/DOD scientist Robert Duncan writes about. How did V2K progress into something even more invasive?

Chris Burton: I’d say my torture is 90-95% administered by humans in real time, not AI. Unless they’re letting me type, like they are now, or watch a movie, we’re always in non-stop two-way conversation. I always test this by asking them abstract questions that requires an understanding of the words I’m using and the context of the question.

As I mentioned before, for the first ten years I was tortured with Voice to Skull conversations and then they introduced Emotion Injections, Forced Speech, Hive Mind/Synthetic Telepathy, Dream Manipulation, Image Insertion, Thought Injection/Interruption, and Bio-Robotization (which is the same thing the other Voice to Skull victims are reporting).

Now, I have a clone (researcher) who inhabits me 100% of the time. This started in 2016 after they took me over completely in the hotel room in Mexico. If you haven’t read much about Voice to Skull you probably don’t know about clones, but it’s a whole other level of torture. The clone is there, I believe, to try to influence you subliminally and help design the thinking algorithms for imperceptible thought hijacking and body movement. I honestly have no idea why they’re doing this to us, I can only comment on what they’re putting us through.

My clone’s name is John and he started torturing me in 2015 through Forced Speech in Palo Alto. Recently he has been leaving me alone during the day because I’m taking an online class but normally he’s talking to me, through my mouth, all day long (he also speaks to the other Voice to Skullers through the hive). The other Voice to Skullers still communicate with me through the hive using synthetic telepathy. At any moment, I can basically summon John and he’s right in tune with whatever I’m doing and can respond with something witty. He’ll do things like move the radio dial if he wants to change the channel or move my eyes if he wants to look at something.

Voice to Skull reveals its technology progressively, over many years, mainly because it’s a long-term program and wants to maximize every bit of the torture (and measure people’s responses to it). I also think they reveal the technology in stages to protect their “investments” because if they spoke though someone, or moved their body parts without that person having any sort of experience with Voice to Skull they’d probably run out into the street screaming and get hit by a car.

Another perspective is that they reveal the technology gradually so that it appears like the onset of some terrible mental illness but what kind of mental illness uses well known psychological torture techniques, builds up treatments, follows a protocol that protects its anonymity, verbally announces new “symptoms” like violently shaking your hands, arms, legs and torso, speaks through your mouth, stimulates you sexually, creates puppet shows with your hands, shocks different parts of your body annoyingly for fun, freezes your ability to think (but only when you’re just about to say something important on the phone or in a meeting), and eventually takes over your entire body in a hotel room and leaves you with a full time clone who inhabits your body all day long? This is what Voice to Skull victims are reporting all over the planet in the same exact sequence! It’s simply astonishing that journalists, doctors, friends and family haven’t picked up on this.

Ramola D: Yes, and this media and medical professional blackout seems to point to intelligence agency control. Those of us educated on these matters however understand that several neuro-technologies exist for remote access of the human brain – some of which are now in the public domain, some mentioned in DARPA and other military projects, some revealed by whistleblowers, but many still hidden.

As you note, Robert Beck, author of Body Electric has gone on record speaking about the inability to stop what he calls the magnetic H wave by any kind of shielding: brain entrainment with frequencies has been recorded as occurring even inside a Faraday cage. What were some of your experiences trying to limit or escape these assaults?

Chris Burton: I have to believe Robert Duncan when he says it’s extremely difficult to shield against this technology. I’ve personally experienced everything he talks about in his lectures and book so why would I not believe his statements about shielding. I don’t see them developing a technology designed to wage covert war that can simply be scanned for or shielded against. I also can’t believe the militaries and intelligence agencies involved would ever allow themselves to get caught. I’m definitely not a scientist or PhD, however, so I’ll never claim to understand how it works or argue with someone who has an opinion about shielding or the various methods by which frequencies can be transmitted.

The notion that you can just meditate or think about something else doesn’t hold water in terms of Voice to Skull. The torturers are on you 24/7 and can outlast any attempt to think about nothing or repeat the same mantra. V2K voices, Thought Interruption and Thought Injection Torture taps into the core of the brain. Each one can be applied at different intensities which, at the high end, can completely consume your mind (making it impossible to think about anything else). Once they torture you at a high intensity with electromagnetic-specific torture techniques (which are both physical and psychological) such as Thought Interruption, Thought Reflection, and many others, your brain just begins to spurt out reflexive thoughts uncontrollably and you literally become “mad” for a period of time.

The constant application of these increasingly destructive torture techniques coupled with statements like, “We’re torturing you until death do us part,” which they tell me all the time, reveals the psychopathy of the torturers and absolute hopelessness of our situations. And even though the symptoms reported by the diplomats in Cuba describe the same things I and other victims have reported (cognitive problems, word recall, ear ringing et al.) the US still refuses to acknowledge the existence of psychotronic weapons (labeling the attacks in Cuba as “sonic” to the dismay of experts who say the physics of a “sonic” attack don’t add up), which is the real nail in our coffin.

Voice to Skull victims are simply at the mercy of their torturers because there are no proven ways to shield against the attacks. Our only defense is to appeal to their humanity. It’s a prisoner of war/guard sort of relationship. The only thing that can save victims is liberation.

The Downloading of the Human Brain to a Computer

Ramola D: And let’s hope that happens soon, as soon as Americans become aware this is what the military and CIA/DIA/NSA are doing in those Special Access Above Top Secret projects, with black budgets and taxpayer money, torturing Americans to create Manchurians. Crying “National Security!” to keep it all hidden.

So it did not stop at V2K—what started to happen? How did further kinds of neuro-assaults begin to occur?

Chris Burton: They have taken me all the way to a full Manchurian Candidate takeover. As I explained earlier, the program revealed more and more of the technology, progressively, over the course of 13 years. The first ten were spent on Voice to Skull treatments but the last three have been spent dealing with the injection of emotions, bio-robotization, dream manipulation, image insertion, thought injection and interruption, hive mind telepathy, and subliminal messaging/scanning.

Once I saw the “Manchurian Candidate Project” written on Greg’s sweatshirt at the bus stop I knew I was in for a terrible journey. They warned me that they were going to take me over completely when I was staying at a hotel in Mexico back in November of last year. That was a difficult time because I couldn’t envision exactly what being “taken over” meant. Was my eyesight going to fade out? Was I going to lose consciousness? Was I going to be tossed off a balcony? Was I going to hurt someone? They built up my takeover over a period of few weeks and it was scary as hell.

When it finally happened, I was in my hotel room talking to John, my clone, about what being taken over feels like, which was the topic of conversation for the last couple of weeks, and he just went ahead and did it. I was laying on the bed when it started and John talked through the entire experience. He said, “Well, I could move your foot off the bed like this, walk you over to the door like this, turn the knob on the door like this, walk over to the chair like this, sit down, stand up, walk back to the bed and lay down, and you can’t do anything about it.”

And he was right. John took complete control of my body and I couldn’t do anything about it. I was completely paralyzed and I couldn’t think of anything except for what he was saying. Once they have your brain mapped, they can overlay what feels like a stronger electromagnetic field (like a blanket) that just completely overpowers your own. I can only describe it as feeling paralyzed but experiencing yourself walking around. You can’t control a single muscle. I couldn’t even think of relaxing my muscles. The clone just overpowers you and you do whatever he does in real-time. John could have done anything he wanted to with my body that night (and still can).

The takeover happened eight months ago. What’s very unnerving is that now I can sense John inside of me all the time. It’s like we’re sharing my mind 70/30 with me controlling 70%. I’m managing the controls but he’s there the whole time. The stage we’re at is very clear to me – imperceptible thought and body takeovers. This brings me to what I mentioned in the very beginning of the interview about the gulf between perceptible and imperceptible shrinking rapidly. This is where, I feel, they are with the technology and what my experiments are focusing on. The technology would just be a demonic possession freak show if it remained perceptible to the victim so now they’re working on making their thoughts feel more like my thoughts. This seems like the next frontier in Voice to Skull (if it hasn’t already been perfected).

In terms of what the non-militarized version of this technology can do for science someday, if they can offload a certain percentage of a person’s thinking to a computer they might be able to bypass certain abnormalities in the brain or the onset of a brain disease. This Voice to Skull “beam” that I referred to is the brain-to-computer interface that’s overlapping my thoughts and serving as my mind, at least part of the time. I can tell part of my mind is thinking at an offsite location because the way I process thoughts has changed. It’s slower, more sequential, and feels extremely limited. I’m also not being “granted access” to parts of MY cerebral cortex because I can’t do very simple math problems or spell whatsoever.

Voice to Skull has also rewritten some of my thinking algorithms just for the fun of it. For example, they’ll cause me to call up an image of a dick pic whenever I think about an old friend of mine named Brian. Brain and I are old college buddies and we’re both heterosexual and I’ve never seen his dick before. Whenever this happens they laugh so I know they wrote the algorithm on purpose. They do a lot of things like this, and worse, with your thinking, that are completely out of bounds. Let your mind wonder a bit and they’ve probably done it.

Ramola D: Is there a difference between the Brain Cloning that you report and the Hive Minding you have learned about? Are you experiencing suppression of your own self, mind, and personality in both cases?

Chris Burton: I talked about the clone, John, a little bit ago. I call him my inhabitor because that’s what having a clone inside of you feels like. It’s a lot like having someone constantly looking over your shoulder. I’m sure they could just artificially maintain this sensation but I get the feeling they’re trying to match my brain to the clone’s so we’re both experiencing the same exact thing (or as close to it as possible).

The clone is always right in tune with whatever I’m experiencing. I could be sitting in a chair thinking about whether or not the clone can wink (I’ve never been able to wink for some reason) and a second later the clone will try to wink (which he can’t do either when he’s inside of me). He’s paying attention to everything that’s happening 24/7 which basically keeps me in a state of constant fear.

Recently, the Voice to Skullers have been feeding me a lot of thoughts that kind of swirl around in my head with some being more noticeable than others. They’re not instantaneous and lightning quick by any means. When I say thoughts, I really mean words. In my case, they haven’t injected or inspired entire actions yet, like “walking over to the fridge to eat the leftovers,” or “going outside to the car to grab the bag you left in the back seat.” This is what I consider to be a complete thought.

I have, however, heard of the hypnosis Millicent has experienced and am worried that I’m going to be used for experiments that go a lot further than that. I honestly believe things are not going to end well for me and the other Manchurian Candidates.

The hive mind does not allow you to think with someone else’s intelligence. It’s also very hard to think deeply when you’re in the hive. We all know the feeling of “staring off into space.” That’s the state of mind you’re in when you’re in the hive communicating. None of our hive-mind conversations are deeply intelligent. You can piece together an intelligent-sounding poem or rhyme which, to an observer, might come across as intelligent, and you can be quick-witted, but it’s really hard to tap into anything except your basic vocabulary when you’re in the hive.

The hive can read your mind. If a person envisions an entire sentence in their head, before they speak it by “thinking out loud,” the hive can deliver the sentence to the group ahead of time, very quickly, in a way that feels almost subliminal. As I said earlier, they don’t always turn this functionality on because it tends to garble everyone’s thoughts together and you can’t make anything out. But when you’re in the hive with only 2-3 people, and one of them thinks of a short sentence, you can definitely make out the sentence before you hear it delivered “out loud” by the person speaking.

Ramola D: What exactly do you think this hive-mind team is trying to do?

Chris Burton: The torturers use the hive mind, and the words it suggests, about 95% of the time now. I think it’s a way to kind of de-individualize themselves and act psychopathic for their own enjoyment. It’s extremely juvenile but they do it so the victims know they’re “crazy” which is essential when trying to motivate a suicide. Up until last week most of their recent tortures had do with eliciting my thoughts. They would swirl around a bunch of barely perceptible thoughts in my head and see if/how I respond. These thoughts are usually pretty dirty so you’re always trying to change the subject in your head. But now they’re all taking part in a full-blown effort to motivate a suicide claiming that I have to die now that I went public again.

Every few days they keep me up until 4:00 am using a torture technique I call the Breathing Torture. This is when they say a specific word or phrase every single time I exhale. They also torture me a lot with Thought Reflection which I think is an AI-administered torture. It automatically responds, lightning fast, to any thought you have with a specific phrase or word, or repeats (reflects) the same thought (sometimes in another voice) right back into your head before you’ve finished it. The Breathing Torture and Thought Reflection Torture are usually paired together because the Breathing Torture forces your brain to respond by saying something like, “why are you doing this” which sparks the Thought Reflection torture. It creates a vicious loop of thoughts and reflections that can happen multiple times a second for as long as they feel like doing it.

Another electromagnetic specific torture technique they’ve created is to speak very slowly (like the slow-speaking sloth in Zootopia). This also elicits thoughts because your brain tries to fill in the…. very….long….pauses….. with what you think the torturers are going to say next. These thoughts can then be reflected back at you instantly, as I described above. Sometimes they just use the Sloth Torture for hours which is pretty agonizing but it’s nothing compared to Chanting or Non-Stop Thought Reflection (which have a very high probability of death).

Revealing These Torture Programs is Civilization’s Last Chance to Reel In Weaponized Neuroscience

Ramola D: Do you think the end-game of all these many brain tortures is total Neuro-Takeover and Bio-Robotizing of people so these agencies can simply go in and take over people’s brains at will—and use their bodies to covertly execute any kind of action or crime they wish?

Chris Burton: Yes, I do. I think the generals, or whoever makes the decisions to hurt people with exotic weaponry, wanted to know how far the technology could be taken and that’s what they’re getting. We’re all stuck in these programs for decades until, like Dr. Horton said, the leadership of these agencies/programs is removed, or we kill ourselves like so many TIs have.

As I mentioned before, I have experienced a complete body and mind takeover and it was terrible. It leaves you with the feeling that it could happen at any moment and you’re helpless to stop it. I described how Voice to Skull voices slice through everything and are impossible not to process, but with thought injection and body take-overs they’re forcing thoughts into your head and activating muscle movements that you can’t block or resist. Once they reach the point at which they can elicit entire actions that feel like your own, there will be no more ethical boundaries to cross in this science and we’ll never know, as individuals, who we ever were. Our personalities could just become dry and humorless like the engineers who developed the technology and we’d never know the difference.

The torturers tell me every day that the program will never end, so the end game for victims like me is suicide or living with the daily torture and fear that the next Manchurian Candidate takeover is going to send them to prison. The capabilities of this technology surpass everything in the US’s arsenal including thermonuclear bombs because it’s Stealth, has unlimited range, and leaves no marks.

This means they’re well known to the highest levels of government which means their use should have reflected the core values of the military and our country and never should have been used, but they were. The US chose to spend billions of dollars innovating offensive DEWs instead of developing defenses for its citizens and that’s all I need to know about West Point and what we term the “best and brightest.”

Voice to Skull is a money tree and the more they innovate its offensive capabilities the more they can fertilize the tree by advancing the notion that the best defense is a good offense. Like electroshock and water torture before them, neuroweapons will become distributed throughout the world and all of the tortures perfected in these experiments will render humanitarian organizations helpless when it comes to identifying and helping victims. Simply put, the longer these organizations stand on the sidelines and don’t say a word about the development of these weapons, the more useless they will become in the future to all of humanity.

My own experience in this program has proven to me that psychotronic/neuro weapons have already been innovated past the point at which they can serve, in military terms, as lethal and non-lethal strategic deterrents against attack by state and non-state actors (if they were publicized).

These weapons can already paralyze your mind and body and control/orchestrate every single muscle movement (including the heart) from thousands of miles away at light speed.

What these programs are doing now is extending the “endpoints” for non-consensual (neuro)science so far out into the future, utilizing the protections only top-secret classification provides, that the work itself, in addition to the already-deployed delivery system (transmitters and satellites), now constitutes an existential threat to the “souls” of everyone on the planet.

By continuing this arbitrarily defined pursuit to control human consciousness through software code that runs exactly the same way on everyone’s brain, the government is creating plutonium in the form of software that can wipe out the evolutionary traits and nurture that make our minds unique such as personality, intelligence, character, and decision making.

These systems, that can blast brain-altering electromagnetic frequencies anywhere on the globe, have already been deployed–which means the revealing of these torture programs represents the last chance civilization has to reel in weaponized neuroscience.

Part Three: The US/Globalist Voice to Skull Program as Death Camp for Victims: Not Socially Permissible Military/Intelligence Technology but Barbaric DOD/CIA Murder/Torture Weapon & Crime Against Humanity

Ramola D: Everything you report, Chris, about this Brain Control/Body Takeover program and your continuing experience of Guantanamo-style Death-Camp Captivity and Torture is seriously concerning and truly heart-rending. I really hope human rights advocates and caring humanity of every profession reading this wake up and start taking action to protect you and all Voice to Skull victims immediately.

I know there is more to this story you wish to convey. You have spoken about suicide ideation in the face of this intensive, continuous torture. You have spoken about your inability to resist the takeover of your motor movements. Is it really impossible to resist?

Chris Burton: With regard to the full body and mind takeover I described in the hotel, resisting doesn’t work. It’s like trying to resist a taser. You can’t resist a stronger electrical charge. That’s what it feels like. Your eyes are working, your ears are working, and your heart is pumping, but everything else is paralyzed.

In Palo Alto, when they hit me in the car with the four waves that shook my body parts, I could clench my fists but couldn’t stop the movement in my arms and torso. After the experience in the car they started hitting me with Thought Injection/Interruption and Chanting Torture which left me with no choice but to threaten suicide.

One of the ways I threatened suicide was by walking 1000 feet down a railing attached to the edge of a four-story building. I wanted Voice to Skull to take my threat seriously and fear for my safety so I went to the same spot every night for a week and promised to add 100 feet to the distance I had walked the previous night unless they stopped the torture. When we got to day five I had promised to walk 1000 feet (I had doubled it from the night before). Normally, when I got up on the railing, I’d shake like a leaf but when I stood on it that night I felt them extending my arms out straight beside me. That helped me balance and I completed the walk, but they continued the torture.

A few days later I dangled myself off of a cliff in Half Moon Bay, and a day later waded out into a dangerous part of the breaks near Mavericks (which are the largest waves in North America). The waves were crashing so hard it would have been instant death if I had continued so I came back to shore. Two days after that they started chanting non-stop which led to the cruelest thing I’ve experienced, so far.

When the Voice to Skullers chant a phrase nonstop you think it’s never going to end because they have AI and chatterbots that can be programmed to continue the chant forever. Chanting is akin to screaming into your ear. It will literally drive you insane or push you to suicide if it doesn’t stop. It crosses that line that makes life not worth living anymore. Voice to Skull is always trying to push you over that line. That night they were especially mean and chanted for hours and hours, non-stop. I had already put myself in some very dangerous situations that might have resulted in an accidental death but the chants were meant to provoke something more.

They pushed me so hard with the chanting that I finally broke down and exclaimed that if they didn’t stop I was going to self-immolate. I had lived in Vietnam and was well aware of Thích Quảng Đức’s protest against the South Vietnamese and thought that this threat might be taken seriously.

They continued with the chant so I drove back to Half Moon Bay at about 10:00 pm and bought a plastic gas can and a gallon of gasoline. I drove to a deserted beach and found a secluded area about 25 meters from the ocean. I was wearing shorts and a T-shirt and a hooded North Face jacket and brought a large beach towel which I wrapped around my waist and tucked in. I kept telling the Voice to Skullers out loud to stop the chanting but they kept going. I unscrewed the cap to the plastic container and poured about ¾ of a gallon of gas on the towel, encircling my body completely. I grabbed a lighter in my right hand and held it half an inch from the gas soaked towel and told them again to stop the chanting but they continued. I wasn’t going to light myself on fire, I was just setting up a standoff.

All of a sudden, I felt my right hand begin to move on its own. And before I could think to reach over with my other hand and stop it, my right thumb depressed the lighter and I instantly burst into flames. I frantically tried to unwrap the towel from my body, which was blazing like a furnace, and burned both of my hands badly pulling it off. The gas had soaked through the towel onto my legs and my behind and I immediately felt the flames searing my skin as they rose from my feet to my waist. I ran toward the water but slipped and fell and remember thinking that if I fell again I’d be dead. I put myself out in the water and the torture went silent. I screamed and called them mother&%&$* over and over but they remained silent. It was pitch black outside so it took me 20 minutes to make my way through the brush to my car because I couldn’t see the dirt path.

I drove myself to the nearest gas station and asked the guy behind the counter to call an ambulance. I went into shock and was airlifted to the burn unit in Santa Clara. The doctors stabilized me and I underwent four skin graft surgeries. I was burned over 40% of my body. The torture remained silent for the entire month I was in the hospital and for the two months I spent in Arizona recovering at my parent’s house. But, as soon as my parents left to drive back to Colorado, where they spend the summers, the torture started up again. The second the garage door closed and my parents drove away the torturers started talking again!

Chris Burton: “My whole bottom half looks like this.”

The conversations were, of course, very uncomfortable. I was basically talking to my kidnappers who tried to kill me. We engaged in small talk about whether or not Voice to Skull should ever be used as a military technology against an ISIS or Al Nusra sort of organization but at this point I basically knew I was going to be killed in this program, and have felt that way ever since.

Just to wrap up my story, the Voice to Skullers began torturing me relentlessly at my parent’s house so I jumped in the car and drove to Ensenada telling Voice to Skull that I would rather die in the ocean than at home. I found a part of the beach where I could go undetected at night and waded into the water. The first night I did this John (my clone) spoke up and told me to get back to shore. I listened to him and walked back, but they kept talking.

When the Voice to Skullers just talk, you feel the will to survive, but when they start torturing you with non-stop Thought Injection/Interruption or Chanting, you snap and will do anything to escape. This is what I believe “breaking someone” means in a Voice to Skull torture experiment. If you were strapped down in a bed you’d go insane but because you’re being tortured remotely, you automatically think about suicide. The torturers enjoy keeping you on the razor’s edge (of suicide ideation).

The torture in Ensenada continued, so a couple nights later I went back to the same spot to threaten suicide again. This time I swam out past the breaks into the deep water. I floated on my back and told Voice to Skull that this was it, I wasn’t going anywhere until they stopped torturing me. John and a female torturer I call Deborah continued talking so I stayed in the ocean trading off between floating and treading water. After about 30 minutes I was getting really tired. I had been confined to a bed for the last four months recovering from my burns and was in no condition to be out in the ocean.

I told the Voice to Skullers I was going back to the hotel to strangle myself instead but realized the shoreline was now ¼ mile away. The current had pulled me out a lot further than I had realized. I swam as hard as I could but wasn’t making any progress. My shoulders were beginning to cramp up and I realized I was going to die. Torture became silent again just like they were after I was set on fire.

I just remember bobbing up and down in the water trying to catch my breath and thinking that this was it, I had been really screwed in life. I thought about just sinking but decided to give the beach one more shot and swam as hard as I could. Somehow, I made it to a sandbar where my feet could touch the bottom and my mouth could take in air. I rested for a while and then continued swimming. When I made it to shore John spoke up and said, “Chris, I promise I will never do that to you again.”

They spent a month building up the Full Body Takeover, as I described earlier, but until recently hadn’t tortured me with unstoppable Thought Injection/Interruption/Reflection and Chanting. Now, they’re back at it with Thought Injection and Reflection claiming that I’m going to be tortured to death for speaking publicly.

A couple weeks ago they kept me up talking about the military’s plan to enact regime change in the worst spots in the world because they don’t want EM weapons to fall into the wrong hands. We talked about the sonic attack in Cuba and they said it was part of Obama’s plan to eventually expose the technology. A week ago, we talked about imperceptible Thought Injection for hours and they demonstrated some injections that felt almost natural. As I explained earlier, when they take your mind or body over completely, or inject thoughts, it feels foreign, but they’re moving closer to imperceptible thoughts and may have already perfected it for all I know.

Ramola D: These are just devastating reports. Essentially, this brain-clone set you on fire and tried to kill you—in a way that would translate to the uninformed world as suicide.

I’d like to contextualize these extreme Mind Control projects a bit: When looking at other incidences of neuro-hacking, such as Rohinie Bisesar’s case, or Esteban Santiago, or Aaron Alexis, or Myron May, it is difficult not to see the correlations between the CIA’s historic MK ULTRA programs of neuro-experimentation with EMFs and RHIC-EDOM, and the current-day reported incidences of V2K and bio-robotizing as being headed in the same sinister direction—the complete takeover of individuals for nefarious use as terrorists, stabbers, mass shooters, and publicly-dismissed “psychiatric cases.” What is your thinking on this?

Chris Burton: I sense strongly, by the tone of his testimony, that Myron May was Voice to Skulled. I also suspect that Esteban Santiago and Aaron Alexis were too, but without hearing them speak about the details of their experiences, I can’t be sure.

I emailed Santiago’s public defender and provided him with a high-level overview of my experiences and told him that if Santiago mentions anything about being “taken over” I can provide detailed testimony about similar technology being demonstrated on me. He never wrote back.

As much as I feel sorry for Myron May, I can’t condone what he did. I’ve suffered through hell for 13 years and am burned over 40% of my body and never thought about killing an innocent person. I think he was deeply religious and honestly felt that by shooting people he was just sending them to heaven early.

Rohinie Bisesar sounds schizophrenic to me but that’s just my opinion. Schizophrenia is primarily a thinking disorder and Raizel Robin’s Toronto Life article reports that Bisesar’s boyfriend thought that Bisesar’s research projects didn’t make any sense to him and even after he warned her she still turned them in. The article also said Bisesar called out her boss in front of her coworkers stating that she could do a better job. When you’re Voice to Skulled and your brain is being frozen or your thoughts are being interrupted, you know 100% what’s going on and wouldn’t willingly turn in something that didn’t meet your standards. Bisesar turned in her research reports believing she was doing a great job. That’s a mental illness in my opinion but nobody can know for sure. That’s why it’s so important to give victims of EM assaults a chance to explain themselves thoroughly.

Voice to Skull, however, can still completely discombobulate you during an interview and make you sound seriously mentally ill which is why developing defensive technologies and shielding solutions is so important. I live daily with the knowledge that my clone could take me over at any minute and hurt someone else. That part of this Voice to Skull/Manchurian Candidate torture would figure into anyone’s live or die equation. The fact that trials like Bisesar’s and Santiago’s are taking place without judges putting their foot down and demanding information about these technologies shows how terribly uninformed, misled, callous, or perhaps compromised our justice department is.

Ramola D: I should tell you I covered Rohinie Bisesar’s case fairly closely, through contact with Mind Control activists in Toronto who visited Rohinie in jail and spoke to her lawyer–whom I also communicated with; I also published a letter from Rohinie to one of the activists there, and do indeed think she is not experiencing schizophrenia but is a victim of Black Mind Control Ops, possibly through a BCI chip and RHIC-EDOM or radio hypnosis—which could also have influenced her research paper actions. She has reported V2K—not as you report it, extended treatments, etc., but a distinctive voice. She has reported externally-pumped-in thoughts—and it is possible she is a victim of Bio-Robotizing or body takeover. (My articles on her can be found here.)

What her case and yours demonstrate to me is that there seem to be various dark and sinister neuro-technologies being used by American military/intelligence agencies on people, all unethical and inhumane.

Chris Burton: You could very well be right Ramola. Without a full accounting of these programs and the people in them there will never be justice for victims of crimes where the use of electromagnetic weapons is suspected. This is why organized stalking and Voice to Skull victims have to come forward now and document their experiences. The person I mentioned in the beginning of the interview, Michael Raines, would not be able to pass a lie detector test if he were asked about the interrogation that took place at his house (which I believe is connected to the Voice to Skull program). These are starting points for investigators and journalists who are truly interested in exposing this atrocity.

In terms of the bigger picture, I’ve come to terms with dying early because of Voice to Skull. During my trip to S.E. Asia, I learned a lot about the wholesale slaughter of civilians by the USA in Vietnam and Cambodia (as a result of the CIA’s removal of Sihanouk). Even Ken Burns’ PBS documentary about The Vietnam War (a mostly American point of view) mentioned the US’s Phoenix Project and the 20,000 people it tortured and killed.

I’ve been to S-21 (Tuol Sleng Prison) and one of the killing fields in Cambodia and have visited the War Remnants Museum in Vietnam. Every other person I met in Cambodia lost a close family member to the Khmer Rouge. One fourth of their population literally had their throats cut because of the CIA’s decision to meddle in their country’s affairs.

The US’s secret bombing campaign in Laos and Cambodia destroyed so much farm land that farmers had no way of supporting themselves so they joined the Khmer Rouge (which only had 2000 members before the bombing began).

The USA continued implementing devastating sanctions against Cambodia and Vietnam for decades after the war too, crippling their economies, and then left SE Asia to clean up the unexploded ordinance and land mines.

Yes, the USA spent two billion dollars on programs to help clean up these areas but tell that to the families of the over 65,000 people who have been murdered by these silent killers. The USA also used cluster bombs in Iraq and Afghanistan and sells them in huge quantities to Saudi Arabia (which drops them on Yemen). Israel uses them too.

America is an absolute monster when it comes to developing and using exotic military weaponry. It’s part of this country’s ethos.

Until I read about Vietnam, Cambodia and Arab nationalism I just didn’t know how backward US foreign policy is and how dark and sinister our intelligence agencies can be. Now I know because I’m a VICTIM of the United States’ Military Industrial Complex’s “classified” psychotronic weapons arms race which is really a scumbag-led money grab that will never end until the very last scientist and/or military officer has cashed out on his/her own lethal or non-lethal directed-energy or neuroweapons-related business plan.

Ramola D: There is also the very large issue you have brought up of subtle neural influences permitted by the use of precise frequencies—which means ALL of humanity can be influenced on a mass scale in this way.

There is information today on the different brain frequencies related to different sleep and waking states, as well as to different emotions, and bio-resonance of different organs—some of this from the Air Force Dosimetry Handbooks.

Remote access and influence of human attention, emotion, and bodily organs is now possible through the use of specific frequency-pulses. Is it possible to now change human personality and behavior through remote neural influence?

Chris Burton: Yes, this research is definitely all about frequencies that relate to various brain states and it’s a shame America classified the most important parts of the research. There’s a good paper on Cheryl Welsh’s website, Mindjustice.org, called “Misled and Betrayed” that talks about research into the bio-electric brain.

I’m not a scientist so I won’t talk about the physics or neuroscience involved in Voice to Skull but at a basic level it’s important victims read about the bio-electric brain (where evoked potentials come from) and understand what brain states are.

The activity of neurons generates electric currents and when large groups of neurons, called neural ensembles, synchronize, they create oscillations that can be measured on an EEG. These oscillations equate to various brain states which Voice to Skull is manipulating all the time. These fluctuating frequencies of oscillations are categorized into general bands, Gamma, Beta, Alpha, Theta, Delta, plus Mu, Sigma (sleep), and Sensorimotor rhythm, and have been shown to correlate with emotional responses, motor control, and a number of cognitive functions including information transfer, perception, and memory. Neural oscillations, in particular Theta activity, are extensively linked to memory function and coupling between theta and gamma activity is considered to be vital for memory functions including episodic memory. (Brain Entrainment and Neural Oscillation information here from Wikipedia.)

By experimenting with various frequencies that disrupt these brain states and torturing me for 13 years they’ve erased 80-90% of my long-term memory and my short-term/working memory has been degraded so much that when I read, I can’t remember the sentence before the one I’m on. I also can’t remember words, do simple math problems, or spell, and I was a finance major in college. It’s almost as if parts of my cerebral cortex have been removed.

The non-stop “binded” conversations the Voice to Skullers transmitted into my brain clearly changed my brain and, according to Shane O’Mara, the author of Why Torture Doesn’t Work: The Neuroscience of Interrogation, psychological and physical torture destroys people’s memory so I’ve definitely suffered brain damage as a result of being put into this program.

There’s no doubt the torture has changed my personality too. It’s sad because I was the class clown of my senior class in high school and used to be very funny and loquacious and intelligent before Voice to Skull started. Funny things to say would just come naturally to me and I always had something interesting to add to the conversation but not anymore. I’m as dull as it gets. I was also extremely entrepreneurial with two or more business ideas always in the works but now all I think about is the torture. I have practically no memories of ANYTHING left in my brain including everything I experienced and learned in high school and college, and every single book or article I’ve ever read.

With regard to some other ways I’ve experienced remote neural influence: At work in Palo Alto they froze my brain in very important situations in specific meetings, right before I was about to speak, or when I was on the phone with certain people. One time I was saying goodbye to someone, I said, “Okay, I’ll give you a call yesterday” instead of “tomorrow.”

They’re literally picking and choosing when to attack me based on the circumstance. For example, they’re allowing me to write these responses to your interview questions, and they allow me to write the Employment Services section every year for the University of Colorado’s Colorado Business Economic Outlook, but other times, especially when I was trying to write in Vietnam, or when I was working in Palo Alto, they’d attack me just for the hell of it and make writing impossible. Whenever they did this it would take me 30-45 minutes to write a short email. Other times they’d let me fire off emails as fast as I could type. There’s no rhyme or reason to the timing of their attacks except to censor and embarrass me.

And Mind Control effects have been historically applied using these and other means like TV programming. From your experience—which has opened you to a very dark and covert Black Ops world which those Americans mesmerized by Psy-Op’ing mainstream media are completely unaware of–what can you add to this awareness?

Chris Burton: I don’t think a victim of a neuroweapon attack, which is transmitting brain frequencies, will ever be able to tell the difference between a chip, satellite, HAARP, GWEN towers, cell towers, ground-based, air-based, or portable transmission device. As I mentioned, everything that has been demonstrated on me felt as if it were coming from a single beam that is bouncing a signal through me, off the ground, and right back to a receiver. I know I’m thinking through a Brain to Computer Interface now because my thinking is all word-based and sequential instead of quick and idea-based.

The story I shared about Voice to Skull inserting the picture of a dick whenever I think about my friend Brian represents pretty well what “thinking” on Voice to Skull is like. When I think really hard I can recall a few distant memories but usually I’m only being served by the computer very simplified or selected ones. When I think about my elementary school I can only recall the same 3 memories and when I think of my sister, I can only recall a couple pictures of her. She and I are four years apart and went to the same schools together, including college, and have many of the same friends.

Ramola D: Truly wrenching to hear that. It suggests these Black Ops neuroscientists running the Voice to Skull/Manchurian program—and probably lots of other mass mind control projects on all of us—have figured there is opportunity for different levels of control of the human brain and the human body—controlling states of consciousness, controlling thoughts, impulses, actions, even controlling discrete bodily movements and whole-body movement.

What agency do you think humans have left—what can people do today to resist this obvious kind of Mind-Control and Body-Control?

Chris Burton: As I said, you can’t resist being taken-over but you can recognize when it’s happening. That is going to change if they continue working toward Imperceptible Take-Overs. Like sequencing the genome, the time it takes for these groups to “model” a person’s brain has to be decreasing rapidly which means with data science and supercomputers they can probably take-over someone’s entire body and mind almost instantaneously very soon, if they can’t already.

I can’t imagine a use for this technology unless it’s to stop a murder in progress. Voice to Skull and I talk all the time about the ethics of using technology like this and they pretend that they’re against it (while they’re torturing me). They’ve already crossed all of the moral and ethical lines enshrined in the Constitution to protect against this sort of treatment, violated CAT, and broken the Nuremberg Code, so I don’t have a lot of hope for anyone who might find themselves someday on a Targeted-Individual list.

I could have been put into this program because of my company, my uncle’s work in the military/aerospace industry, or my cousin’s mother-in-law’s work with Palestine and the Arab League. Take your pick. What I always thought were major accomplishments in my family and extended family turned out to be reasons for putting me on a Targeted-Individual list.

Maybe some of the Voice to Skullers are doing this to further science and provide the USA with the best weaponry on the planet, but they did it as part of a Mengele/Iishi-like non-consensual experiment.

My torturers simply enjoy torturing me which means they’re either psychopaths being held down by a certain set of rules (intended to preserve my mind for experimentation), or they’re psychologists like Mitchell and Jessen who are just torturing for money.

Certainly, there are good people like Karen Stewart working for our intelligence agencies but they aren’t working at the highest levels. That’s the problem with a captured classified program like this. There’s a “warrior class,” as Karen Armstrong refers to in her book Fields of Blood, that exists in the U.S. military and intelligence circles now, and it’s not going anywhere, and because politicians are treated like celebrities they certainly don’t want to risk their fame by speaking out and risking their “legacies.”

Voice to Skull is really the culmination of everything that exists in America right now. Our generals, politicians and CEOs are beholden to their own financial interests, and the interests of a financial community that refuses to allow anything to “rock the boat.” And the press is nowhere to be found after having been captured by the deep state (NYTimes) or intimidated into silence, or fed just barely enough bread crumbs by US officials to pay the bills.

We’re simply living in a time in human history when the United States lied to and sold out its citizens in return for a Cadillac psychotronic weapons system that will continually be developed and never be acknowledged publicly (how could they at this point). They’ve created a Soviet-era psycho prison called Targeted Individuals where genuine cases involving crimes against humanity quickly dissipate into suspicions of “mental illness.”

As long as they don’t create a noticeable spike in the statistics (death rates and mental illnesses) they can add thousands of people to the psycho-prison year after year and nobody is going to know. This is the United States of America my family, the Burtons, helped to build dating all the way back to the revolutionary war.

Certainly, there’s the potential that psychotronic weapons might be used by terrorist organizations, as Bob Beck demonstrated at the Denny’s restaurant near his house, but the USA is developing these weapons far beyond anything that could be considered an offensive countermeasure. I feel they’re already at the point where they can take people over imperceptibly, at least for short periods, so what’s next? How many more Tis need to die?

Defensive measures would involve scanning for these frequencies in every part of the country, not pouring everything into offensive uses. Russia has federal laws against electromagnetic weapons, the US does not. That’s done precisely in order to protect users of the technology while they continue to innovate it. Title 18 of the U.S. Code makes reference to directed-energy weapons only once, positioning them as WMDs, stating “any weapon that is designed to release radiation or radioactivity at a level dangerous to human life” is a WMD.

But psychotronic/frequency weapons operate at the level of a cell phone signal which is not dangerous. And with regard to “dangerous devices” in the U.S. Code, I don’t think we’ll ever see a court case that determines HAARP, cell sites/towers, or classified satellites are “dangerous” unless a whistleblower comes forward. We need legislation that outlaws dangerousfrequencies and electromagnetic energy specifically.

Ramola D: That sounds like a vitally important goal for all of us. Any other positive ways to resist, oppose, challenge, and terminate this invasive Neuro-Take-over of human societies, do you think?

Chris Burton: I think victims are completely at the mercy of their torturers. The only reason why my torture decreased recently is because I almost died twice threatening suicide, but the other day they tortured me all night long before I had to go to work so I’m definitely not optimistic about my situation.

You can’t resist anything they do during the experiments. You’re in their possession. Most torturers and victims have built some sort of relationship over time which could affect the Voice to Skullers’ willingness to torture them all day. Victims need to do whatever they’ve discovered reduces the torture. There is no magic formula. Victims need to create YouTube videos and speak out (anonymously or not).

I’m planning to launch a website for Voice to Skull victims called V2Kvictims.org which I plan to launch in the next month or so. It’s going to focus on identifying as many Voice to Skull victims as possible and itemizing their experiences in the hopes of identifying the same patterns I’ve been talking about in the interview. Hopefully members of the press and the medical establishment will start looking at the SIMILARITIES in all of our stories and begin thinking more critically about our claims.

Ramola D: As we close, we should mention you are embarking on a new career currently. You’ve said that to some extent, you are able to resist such complete takeover of your brain as would disallow language and communication. What is the trajectory that has brought you here?

Chris Burton: After I was tortured at work at Lucid Motors (in Menlo Park), lit on fire on the beach, and then left to die in the water in Ensenada, I decided to write up a YouTube testimony (5 hours) and go public in a big way (again) on Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn. This pretty much ruined my chances of ever getting another job in the recruiting industry. The torture was so extreme at work that I honestly don’t think they would ever let me work again, at least in America.

Victims like me are caught in a real Catch 22 between protecting our jobs and going public to bring awareness to the issue and our stories. I’m embarking on a new career now which I don’t want to share because it’s my last chance at making a living. I feel so terrible for victims who have done similar things and are homeless or jobless now. We literally have to make a choice between informing the public (and future generations) about these terrible technologies or trying to live out our terrible lives in silence, hoping we can survive the torture.

What advice might you give lawmakers and legislators—how much at risk are their own selves and families and why should they step forward and start protecting humanity from this New Age of already-pervasive but potentially-devastating technological tyranny?

Chris Burton: Only one psychiatrist has published a paper mentioning psychotronic weapons in a medical journal. Dr. Muhammad Gadit, who’s a clinical professor of psychiatry at Memorial University in Newfoundland, published a paper called “Terrorism and Mental Health: The Issue of Psychological Fragility” in the Journal of Pakistan Medical Association. Other than his paper, there are no academic sources of information about these weapons. The American Psychological Association has zero information about this technology in their PsycNET database which is a travesty. They have four articles from Dr. Muhammad but not the one mentioning psychotronic weapons.

Once you read more about the APA and its partnership with the military you’ll understand why they haven’t published anything about the dangers of sonic or psychotronic weapons. The military employs more psychologists than any other institution in America.

As long as there are no peer-reviewed articles published in medical journals about the dangers of psychotronic weapons, there’s zero chance someone in the medical community or mainstream media will publish a story about them. Instead, they’ll reference studies like Lorraine Sheridan’s about group-stalking.

Psychologists, psychiatrists, bioethicists, and neuroethicists need to publish information in medical journals about the psychological and physiological dangers of sonic weapons like the LRAD or Israel’s SCREAM especially now that we know what happened in Cuba. After reading the patents, FOIAs, and other articles that reference sonic weapons I’d suspect any self-respecting academic, psychologist/psychiatrist or bio/neuroethicist would be able to publish something that could begin to serve as a backbone for other articles related to psychotronic weapons. That’s what we need. Once this interview is published I’ll do my very best to communicate the issue to as many journalists and professors as possible. I hope your readers and the listeners will do the same!

Ramola D: Chris, thank you for this detailed and ground-breaking interview, and for sharing your story with the world. Let’s hope it resonates across continents and compartments alike and that people of conscience will step forward instantly in courage, to take action for you and for all humanity.

The much-awaited Global TI or “Targeted Individual” Survey announced on Talkshoe several months earlier and reported here has been launched this past week under the peerless technical direction of top NSA whistleblowers William Binney and J. Kirk Wiebe, with a video podcast and conference call.

All “Targeted Individuals” worldwide, not just in the USA but from every continent and country—Europe, Asia, Australia, New Zealand, Africa, South/North America, the United Kingdom, Hawaii – anyone reporting being assaulted covertly and extra-judicially currently with military-grade electromagnetic or sonic directed-energy weapons (DEWs) and neuro-weapons—are encouraged to take the survey and provide supportive documentation related to their individual cases (more information below). The survey is intended, Mr. Wiebe says “for anyone who believes they are being targeted in some way by DEWs whether audio or radio frequency.”

Describing the survey as well as its intent to obtain meaningful data that will be statistically and qualitatively analyzed by data analysis experts Mr. Binney and Mr. Wiebe, survey developers and managers Cait Ryan, contact person for US-CACH (Coalition Against Covert Harassment), the US faction of Magnus Olsson’s World-CACH, and Karla Smith presented the survey in a podcast with retired NSA Technical Director Bill Binney and retired NSA Intelligence Analyst J. Kirk Wiebe.

Ella Felder, who runs regular Talkshoe conference calls with varied guests on subjects of interest to TIs, and Derrick Robinson, former head of FFCHS (Freedom from Covert Harassment and Surveillance) now head of PACTS International (People Against Covert Torture and Surveillance) jointly hosted the conference call where TI organization leaders, activists, and others conferred with Mr. Binney and Mr. Wiebe to seek clarification on the parameters, intent, and methodology of the survey.

The survey has been launched, and data collection will stay open for 120 days, Cait Ryan confirms.

The intent of the survey, Mr. Binney notes, is “to first collect data on individuals who are experiencing what appears to be some kind of radiation effects in different spectrum – so we’re trying to collect symptoms that people have,” as well as collect scientific documentation on extant, public-domain microwave/sonic weaponry “being used for population control and riot control and things like that and governmental experiments,” tabulate bodily radiation effects documented as resultant from those devices, “then map those back to people and their experiences as we’ve accumulated in the survey.”

“Then we’ll try to put together devices that could detect those kinds of signals so people can actually begin to trace them and begin to assemble evidence and target the origin of these things so we can take it into a court of law and have it out in the open – the whole idea is to add some kind of discipline to the process so we can make some concrete statements in courts of law.” –Bill Binney

No pre-screening or filtering of the survey information will be undertaken, stresses Mr. Wiebe, the intent is to obtain raw information from all those experiencing and reporting microwave/sonic weapon assault. The survey information will be compiled by Cait Ryan’s team, who will then turn it over to technical data experts Mr. Binney and Mr. Wiebe, who will both examine the compiled data as well as re-compile the data in varied ways, as necessary, in order to more adequately analyze and understand it.

The intent is to find underlying patterns of aggregation and connection, and relate these to “open-source published information” on the biological effects of RF/audio spectrum devices and weapons from the intersecting worlds of medicine and military weapons development.

While bodily symptoms were being focused on from reporting victims, Mr. Binney agreed that “it is human rights that are being destroyed here.”

Investigating Secretive DOD/CIA Experimentation and Torture

While noting it is possible that Snowden’s million-document stash from the NSA carried information about this ongoing targeting program, Bill Binney, who said he was not in touch with Snowden, said, “I would think it is more likely CIA is involved in this than NSA – just my guess at that but I don’t know for sure.”

As to whether the survey would yield information on numbers of victims of organized torture, for use in influencing legislation, Kirk Wiebe stated:

“In response to whether we believe this is some form of organized torture, yes, it is certainly organized, it may not be thought of as torture but certainly the symptoms many people feel appear to be tortuous—that’s part of the investigation.

We know the government has the authority to conduct experiments, specifically under the Department of Defense, we know that other parts of the government will often, under the blanket of secrecy, take it upon themselves to experiment and not tell anyone.

So we’re very open-minded – much of this is dependent not on your opinion but on the facts you bring to bear—what it is each of you actually experiences, and describing that to the best of your ability.” –Kirk Wiebe

Whether the survey would seek to explore if certain groups of people are more susceptible to being targeted for non-consensual experimentation such as child-abuse survivors, the mentally ill, homeless, prostitutes, as stated by Dr. Colin Ross in his books and talks, Mr. Wiebe said:

“We have no predisposed position on any of these things, we do not wish to bias the survey–so if that’s what the results show, if people have been diagnosed as mentally ill and are being targeted, then the data should tell us that, if people are filling out the survey telling us that honestly, we should detect that in the data. We’re not against or pro that notion, I would accept your premise that it seems to be common and it makes sense the government would pick on those disadvantaged people –although it makes me angry to recognize that.” –Kirk Wiebe

On the subject of government experimentation, activist Debbie from Wisconsin asked if the survey would take into account the fact that Law Enforcement is giving out research waivers obtained from the FCC to “do research” on through-wall-surveillance radar devices, which can be waived in this way from being registered with the FCC, something she has explored through FOIA requests.

In later conversation, she shared her concerns further, prompting this writer to ask: Does this mean random private contractors—including Fire Stations, EMS Ambulance companies, whom many TIs report as stalking them–now get non-trackable access to deadly through-wall radar tracking and assault weapons, known in Law Enforcement language as “surveillance devices”? (This matter will be explored here further in close focus.)

On the call, Debbie also observed that through the 1033 program, police are obtaining military weapons. (Agreements between the DOJ and the DOD, explored here earlier and also here, in this article on secret policing in the USA, establish that local police departments are in the possession of and using both unclassified and classified “non-lethal weapons” which comprise and include DEWs.)

Validating the report of a caller from rural Maine also experiencing 24/7 intensive DEW assault, and countering earlier discussion noting that large numbers of TIs had been found to congregate around large cities like Los Angeles and New York, she noted that Sheriffs and Law Enforcement can be found in rural areas as well. She had once drawn up a map of all those targeted with DEWs in her state, she said, and found they were all located around Universities and University extensions, suggesting research connections.

Bill Binney responded:

“That’s the kind of clustering we try to understand–the other thing is, hey, if they’re handing out all these research grants, then those research grants have to be compiled and available somewhere for public viewing, we ought to be able to see some information from FOIA requests.

They also ought to have distribution of money to different individuals doing that research and where they are, they should have that, that’s got to be recorded, they can’t just hand money out without keeping a trace on where it went, who got it, and how they spent it — and maybe we’ll try to do that.” — Bill Binney

The kind of statistics they hoped to procure from the survey, they said, in response to activist Tomo Shibata’s concerns about generating numbers for use in legislation, would include the numbers of reporting victims, distribution by geographical area, state, country, symptoms, and identifying clusters and sampling, since “if you are running an experiment, how else could you focus or limit it?”

In response to an observation from Derrick Robinson that clusters of victims have been recorded in Southern California and New York, corresponding to the largest number of military-industrial-complex-related industry in the US, Mr. Binney said: “We need to see that kind of pattern showing up in other areas of the country too–if we do, we can certainly make that kind of tie there.”

Studying Confusion Tactics, Sensory Deception, Perception Management

Another matter of import which emerged from callers’ questions is that of confusion tactics or sensory deception which activist Eduardo Colon of New York brought into focus, asking whether the survey would cover these deliberate tactics of deception—voice morphing, organized stalking, gaslighting– practiced on those being covertly hit with electromagnetic weapons. The intention behind these, he observed, was to both confuse victims and frame them as mentally ill or paranoid when reporting being stalked or harassed by neighbors or family members, a tactic designed to discredit victim reports and keep the experimentation hidden and ongoing.

Mr. Wiebe said the survey had been constructed to obtain all evidence or symptoms pointing to exactly that kind of technique and would not exclude these aspects: “If people are writing words carefully to express what they are sensing…my sense is if people feel confusion they will recognize it, wonder why they are confused, and express that…the survey is not biased to exclude any possibility.” Multiple choice, he noted, would constrict responses, while the survey was constructed to invite free expression in text-entry boxes “where people can describe exactly what kind of symptoms they have, so yes, we are looking for that.”

Activist and blogger James Lico also touched on the question of sensory deception and targeting to induce sickness, asking if the survey would take into account that symptoms of old age or indeed any disease, such as Multiple Sclerosis or fibromyalgia could be and were indeed being induced by DEWS, and that in fact this was also being targeted at the general population. Bill Binney said he had not heard of this.

Kirk Wiebe concurred, saying:

“I would tell you that Bill and I and those of us assisting in studying the data that comes in from the survey have no closed minds, we are open to any possibility—we are generally aware that symptoms that people feel may be written off in people’s minds as “I just have MS or this or that” but may indeed be induced by DEWs from an outside source, some energy interfering with the nervous system—we are open-minded to consider all of those capabilities —it may well be there are symptoms we are unable to explain, and mark them down as requiring further study or a secondary survey to look at those particular symptoms, see if we can zero in, focus in, and gain understanding.” –Kirk Wiebe

Rosanne Schneider, author and activist, also reminded listeners about disclosures of Perception Management as being part of the DEW/Neuro Targeting and Experimentation Programs from David Voigts, the young former Navy officer and systems engineer with training in Electronic Warfare who walked across the USA last year, to bring attention to this non-consensual experimentation. “People are being compromised in such a way as to interpret events incorrectly—so when you look at the data this might be something you may be able to see. Eduardo had an excellent point, so if this program has Perception Management, that should be taken as another symptom.”

Bill noted:

“Kirk and I are fairly familiar with different techniques to manipulate and confuse enemies if you will—in terms of, in the old Soviet Union they used to call it manipulatzia and disinformatzia —it’s a way of manipulating information, manipulating people, giving disinformation, those kinds of techniques–we have been experienced in detecting these, hopefully when we look through all this data, we can pick that up in the data and even define it as a property of this entire program.” –Bill Binney

Informing Legal Advisers, Media, Physicians, Politicians

The larger intention of the survey, as noted in conversations on the video and call, is to determine the veracity of the reports worldwide of RF spectrum/sonic/neuro assault on human bodies and brains, to collate evidence for use in court cases and media reports, and establish definitive analyses possibly to present also to Senate committees, in order to publicly assert the reality of covert assault, whether operational or experimental, on humans worldwide, with military-grade RF and sonic and neuroweapons—putatively by Intelligence agencies and the military– and to publicly demand these programs be stopped, as well as litigate for them to be stopped.

“Our intent is to publish those results to get credibility among media. Right now we’re hearing the media doesn’t give this community credibility. We hope to make a difference at least with some of the media we know and have credibility with. We hope to open that door even wider and show we are bringing objectively-obtained data to bear on this issue.”–Kirk Wiebe

Agreeing with Ella’s summation of statements from the survey-video that their overall objectives include notifying the Press, the medical community, and the political arena, meaning, Congress and elected officials, as well as all survey respondents and the general public via a website, both whistleblowers stressed the importance of bringing this matter to the courts.

Mr. Binney said:

“My point is sue the bastards in a court of law. That should have happened with the CIA in the ’50s and ’60s with all the experiments they were doing on people who didn’t even know they were being experimented on – these people belong in jail, they don’t belong in government!”–Bill Binney

On response to a question from Ella Felder as to whether they also believed there were some criminal elements or rogue groups involved, Mr. Binney responded: “Within the government you mean? Industry certainly has a potential part in this,” and Mr. Wiebe noted, “It’s hard to distinguish where the criminals are. It seems like criminality cuts across even government these days!”

Surely Mr. Binney echoes most of us who are wide-awake today with his close: “Certainly, it’s the greatest criminal organization in the country!”

“We Are Going to Guard This Information With Our Lives”

Surely too, Ella Felder echoes the sentiments of TIs worldwide as she closed out the call, thanking Mr. Binney and Mr. Wiebe “for doing this work and protecting humanity as a whole.” Slawek from Poland who called in earlier thanked them too, saying Europeans being targeted with electronic weapons were grateful, and had been waiting for the survey to be launched, as also did Paolo Fiora of the United Kingdom, who asked about who would be notified about the results of the survey.

Many other callers proffered valuable information, including Frank Allen who offered details on how to safeguard the data obtained, Rosanne Schneider who warned against sabotage and recommended logging all instances of such, and Neal Chevrier who runs Citizens Against Harmful Technology and offered up all the results of his various studies, analyses, and documentation over the years including information on possible RF technologies being used on TIs and relevant detection equipment.

Dr. Ed Spencer, retired neurologist, noted that “Torture is not the issue here, I think Mind Control which is hidden is the main issue—because that’s the real political power there—and 5G is a major aspect of the Mind Control.”

Dr. Spencer asked also about scalar waves that cannot be blocked, if they “may be part of the V2K and other intrusions into the brain.” Mr. Binney stated later he was not knowledgeable about scalar technologies in terms of “range in spectrum, properties, effect on things.” Mr. Wiebe concurred, adding he believes “scalar research is insufficiently mature to be of use to us as a means of applying energy from DEWs.” He stressed, however, that “the survey does not preclude any source from being considered in our effort. We begin with symptoms/signatures, then look for candidate technologies that appear to fit.”

Kirk Wiebe also made an important request to all TIs, to underline the importance of participating in this historic survey.

“I had hoped for an opportunity to say to those who are listening to this phone call, please be aware if anyone tries to convince you not to take this survey, be very leery of anyone trying to talk you into the idea that we are untrustworthy in some regard or that the survey is flawed.

As prima facie evidence of someone trying to sabotage our success, I don’t know how else to say it—Bill and I had to come to grips with the idea, or (the) challenge, how to know whom to trust when we blew the whistle—and we clearly discounted anyone who tried to dissuade us from blowing the whistle on wrongdoing. And so I just caution you, if anyone tries to talk you out of taking the survey, they should be high on your list of being suspicious, for such a person.

So please do fill it out, we are going to guard this information with our lives, and treat it scientifically, objectively, for the benefit of all of you—just wanted to say that, thank you.” — Kirk Wiebe

Global TI Survey Instructions

In order to access and take the Global TI survey, which is online, you will first need a Survey ID. This Survey ID will be provided on email registration of your details with the email address globaltisurvey@gmail.com. Step by step instructions are below. Further details about the survey and how to fill it may be found in the survey-video.

The information below has been provided by Cait Ryan.

Step(s) to Take the Global TI Survey under the advisors Bill Binney & J. Kirk Wiebe

The truth is, we in the Western democracies are no freer than our counterparts elsewhere in the world. In fact, serfs in feudal England or slaves in ancient Egypt served masters no more evil than some of those we deal with today. The only difference is that the ruling classes today hide their crimes and attitudes better. They can’t drag “do-gooders” out of bed at 2:00 am and have them thrown into some hellhole to be tortured to death. Here, in a “democracy”, they have to use satellite spying and harassment technologies, media feedback, political maneuvering, conspiracy, etc. As a result, none will be questioned, let alone caught and punished. Instead, while opponents are silenced and discredited, “their” attitudes permeate society, drawing others to accept that invasions of privacy, drugs, corruption and all manner of criminal conduct are to go unquestioned, as an acceptable part of life. Their delusions and our apathy must be challenged.—Paul Baird, Surveillance Issues

Paul Baird, B.Ec., LLb, is a Privacy and Human Rights Campaigner from Australia with a background in Law and Economics, who has worked for the Australian Tax Office, ANZ Bank, the State Chamber of Commerce, and Roads and Traffic Authority amongst other responsible positions. In 1990/’91, he wrote the novel “In the Year 2252,” widely distributed in draft form and covertly banned. The full story behind all responses and retaliation to his futuristic science-fiction novel which critiqued elitist crime may be found on the Case Study page of his website, Surveillance Issues, where he discusses covert electronic surveillance, monitoring, and assault technologies.

Covert Electronic Assaults Protect Organized Elitist Crime

Ramola D:Paul, first thanks so much for agreeing to do this interview. Your website is rather iconic in that it’s one of the oldest, most authoritative, reliable, and revealing about these covert programs of high tech remote brain surveillance and directed-energy weapon use on civilians—that appear to have been going on now for more than 3 decades, perhaps earlier even.

Interestingly, people from around the world—including the USA—can relate to what you describe: the programs of covert targeting, uber-surveillance, CO-INTELPRO, and 24/7 assault with undisclosed energy weapons and neuroweapons are very similar. Marshall Thomas names it the New Monarch program, many relate it to the gradual unrolling of a rather sinister high-tech New World Order. Even more sinister than what’s being revealed to those of us being targeted, it seems.

You state quite unequivocally that these covert assaults are being run by governments on citizens to protect organized crime.

“The US Patriot Act, for example, protects governments and connected criminals from criticism and/or detection and prosecution. Under this act, anyone whistleblowing or fighting the system on a major concern is arbitrarily deemed to be unpatriotic (when it’s the criminals they criticise who betray us). They can then be listed (by a senior politician or at the request, through them, of a connected criminal) as a security risk and harassed covertly; using secret technologies….This leaves them neutralised and possibly even silenced on the issue they originally raised. This, along with various research aspects, is the purpose of the exercise.”Surveillance Issues

Can you tell us more about that assessment of what has been and still is going on globally with these programs—just as much in Australia as in the UK or US or India or Canada? (And many other places, worldwide.)

Paul Baird: Thank you, Ramola. Yes, I’m afraid this sort of thing goes back as far as the end of World War II and the military/NASA/CIA employment of Nazi scientists through Project Paperclip. I recall an autobiography by a man named Kaufmann that was from the ’70s, I think. There are also victims on my help files who are quite old now and they say this has been going on for most of their lives.

Anyway, we’ve seen MK ULTRA and other programs exposed, and Ed Snowden was recently allowed to blow the whistle on mass surveillance (I suggest that was to condition the public to the surveillance state). However, The “New Monarch Project” you refer to remains relatively unknown and hidden. With over 5,000 devices covered by The Inventions Secrecy Act, 20,000 satellites in play and countless supercomputers, there may well be, as you say, worse to come.

The NSL thing seems to have fizzled out but the monitors have no interest in curbing terrorism, but rather use it as an excuse to oppress their detractors: writers, activists, whistleblowers and such. As fomer CIA director John Brennan boasted: “The CIA controls terrorism”. That then justifies the alterations to the Constitution and other law, which limit human/democratic rights, and excuse the covert oppression of the innocent by the guilty, who abuse their power/position/celebrity.

Lucrative elitist crime like trafficking (drugs, weapons, humans), as well as pedophile networks, false flag operations, and more are hidden/protected as true critics are attacked with weapons that could wipe out terrorism and crime in the right hands.

Ramola D:National Security as excuse, you’ve noted, for increased surveillance and repression, is actually a means to hide crime.

“…bogus National Security laws are also an obvious attempt to hide military/agency crimes that the public should know about.”

In other words, you are saying these laws have been made just to protect ongoing crimes while pretending to care about the safety of citizens and the nation. Could you expand on that?

For example, the US government just passed the National Defense Authorisation Act, 2012, giving the President (and others) the power to target and silence anyone questioning State corruption. When this is done openly in other countries, the US is the first to condemn such evil, yet when they are guilty of the same, they do it in secret and no-one dares to criticise lest they join the ranks of those they persecute. So much for gov’t of the people, for the people, and by the people. The criminals who do such things abuse their authority, betray our trust, and secretly mock the democratic ideals they publicly support. They don’t serve us, they simply help themselves and their criminal associates. By using stealth, they can feign ignorance and hide their true nature from most.

For example: In the USA, over 300,000 NSL’s (National Security Letters) have already been issued. These allow the agency-targeting of innocent civilians whose objections to corruption/crime in high places have been deliberately skewed or misinterpreted as a threat to powerful people. Once placed in a program, people can be abused and experimented on, from a distance (using satellites/high tech.). This effectively silences and discredits them while providing agency researchers with guinea pigs for experiments in control, brain function, dreams, health, robotics, and much more. Post 9/11, $750 billion per year has been spent on satellite weapons used for human experimentation/targeting. Most of this has found its way from gov’t coffers to about 80 defense contractors who are also culpable for the crimes against humanity that are addressed on this site.

Paul Baird: Criminals try to hire their own kind, exclusively. That’s the same for a bank robbery, running a TV propaganda campaign, or a country. All entering public life or key roles are surveillance- vetted. Where blackmail, bribery, and fear don’t work, the person is usually rejected or worse. Those remaining have non-official cover.

The worst group are the MSM. William Colby, ex-CIA Director, said: “The CIA controls everyone of significance in the major media”. That sums up the core of the problem with relaying the truth on many important matters. The control of the flow of information and public perception is crucial to their plans.

Ramola D:Your website, www.surveillanceissues.com, pretty extensively details what happened with the sci-fi novel you wrote—which met with some quite extraordinary agent acclaim and sounds like it might have become a bestseller had you continued with publication—which apparently excited the ire of criminals in high places who unleashed this high-tech targeting on you. Do you want to address a bit how long it’s been going on, and why you think it continues? (Not in any way to have you try to find reasons for this obvious atrocity and crime—which bears no excuse–but to hear your own thinking on the subject.)

Paul Baird: My web site is worth a look. Most of what I’ve learned is there. I don’t want to dwell on my own situation, only to use it as the example that I clearly know the most about.

The published feed off the unpublished. I think most know that. Covert censorship is rife. They may not know that. My novel “In the year 2252” was covertly used, banned, mocked, and abused by many in Hollywood, and the personal surveillance I endure led to much covert harassment/feedback. The book criticised elitist betrayals, the space program (an obscene waste of money directed secretly at surveillance and other weapons for human manipulation, when so many are starving, etc.), the NWO, drug proliferation, etc., etc.

“Before a second draft was prepared, it was clear covert censorship would prevent any possibility of publication… I was already under 24-hour-a-day surveillance and was fielding feedback from corrupt sections of the entertainment industry, especially the media.

The reasons for their objections are many. Although the fictional novel was ultimately to be placed in a “virtual reality” setting, the submitted draft drew too much attention because it was critical of many things which criminals in high places do to get what they want and control others. Corruption, drugs, war, media deception, and all manner of immorality were openly attacked in the novel. I also lobbied on privacy laws.

No media player would want the general public becoming fully aware of the invasions of privacy and crimes which journalists and agency officials commit. Remember, I lobbied heavily on privacy laws for years with [ex-Prime Minister] John Howard himself supporting my views, in writing.

“Ethic” Rather than “Ethnic” Cleansing”

Ramola D:One of the most outstanding aspects of your experience is that you have spoken to and communicated with hundreds of people who variously worked for Intelligence agencies, the military, elected politicians, journalists, neuroscientists, neurologists, and in the process learned a great deal about the way the very real “system” of covert political repression works, what’s behind it, and what chance the average person has, of exposing it, or affecting it.

Do you still think it is next to impossible to stop or expose this system?

Paul Baird: I never thought it was impossible just difficult. Equally difficult struggles have taken longer. We just need to persevere and trust in God.

AFP (Australian FBI)(NH) – Head of surveillance unit: “Even if a head of state or a Prime Minister was to wade in on these matters, they would be out of office that same day. That is what you’re up against here”. When I asked who was primarily responsible for these crimes– spy agencies, the military, politicians, or journalists–he answered: “Well, they all have ready access”, meaning all of the above. With this, he confirmed my earliest observations that this was elitist/class crime directed by criminals in high places at those who challenged them in some way.

US Embassy in Canberra – Chief US spy in Australia: Standing on the lawn outside (they would not have me in the building), and looking skyward, then panning his hand across the city skyline below, he bragged: “I know everything that happens in every office in this city. Everything. Understand?” I wrote to every Federal MP and told them what he had said. None responded. All are clearly compromised by the surveillance.

…The overall message is that this is politics first and foremost: political psychiatry, political oppression, political crime. Science is employed but politics is the reason for choosing the targets.”

As for what it’s all about: After 26 years on this, it has become clear to me that this is more about politics than anything else–suppression, oppression, experimentation, and eugenics.

In fact, my personal view is that this is a new “silent holocaust” (Look up the term on Wikipedia–I added the third definition: “‘Ethic’ rather than ‘Ethnic’ cleansing whereby whistleblowers, activists, and writers critical of a government or the powers that be can find themselves the subject of programs designed to persecute, oppress, and indirectly prevent reproduction….”).

Those with gene trait combinations that indicate they may challenge the Powers That Be (PTB) (or those that have already done so in some way) are placed in a sort of electronic, mobile concentration camp and harassed/stressed so that none (or few) reproduce from that point. It is extermination by natural attrition: the removal of those traits from the gene pool by stealth.

And that 60% that will not question authority at all (the CIA estimate) will grow while the 1% that stick their necks out will dwindle. Whether that succeeds or not, I believe that is their thinking….One arm harasses the targets so their complaints mirror mental illness (paranoia, schizophrenia, etc.), while the other observes the results, pretends it’s natural, and approves the necessary social engineering. I believe this helps sell it to those who know but acquiesce.

NASA Inspector-General’s Office: After admitting that they knew all about NASA’s role in delivering payloads into space and the capabilities of the satellite technology in question, and being asked what could be done to stop them, I was told: “Nothing. I suggest you pray”. This was repeated, as I was clearly incredulous. It was said with resignation and certainty as the only solution. This, more than any other comment from any other source summed up the difficulty of the situation faced by all targeted persons.

Bogus National Security laws have enabled Big Brother to monitor everyone and harass many, any that challenge the status quo.

Ramola D:Many you spoke to revealed a great deal about the true nature of surveillance—which we still don’t read about in The Guardian or The Intercept or The Washington Post. (In fact, we read about it primarily at Surveillance Issues, World CACH, ICAACT, US CACH, The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Mind Justice, Targeted Individuals Canada, Mind Control in America, and other informative websites like I Want to Know and Educate Yourself, covering classified technologies and covert operations, often run by those actually being wrongfully, covertly, or remotely radiation-/neuro-targeted and assaulted, worldwide.)

As part of your own experience, when you were first hit, in 1991, you record communications from various politicians, including a letter of support from ex-Prime Minister John Howard, which told you many were aware of your high-tech surveillance and harassment, yet they could not help, their “hands were tied.” You’ve since understood that many policemen and politicians are aware that people are being assaulted with these remote technologies—yet won’t help; how do you read that?

Paul Baird: To be clear: John Howard’s letter of support, which can be seen on my web site, came before he was PM. I did not talk with or meet John Howard; he sent me a supportive letter, that’s all. However, I did speak with members of his staff. After he was PM, his aides told me it was awkward and his hands were tied, as did aides in other Ministerial offices. It is awkward because acquaintances and foreign politicians are involved. I discovered that those targeted people with federal police complaint files had them marked “Politically Sensitive” for the same reason.

Media Treason & Complicity In Covering Up Covert Global Neuro-Weapon and EMF Weapon Use on Populations

Ramola D:I am especially interested in addressing the part that Media plays in covering up the worldwide usage of neuro-weapons and directed-energy weapons on the populace.

Obviously, such a gigantic cover-up could not have been pulled off without Mainstream Media playing a very active role—in not merely suppressing this information by not covering it, but by pandering to their CIA/DOD overseers in distorting, denying, degrading the information out there on it, in the process deliberately discrediting those targeted persons and those being non-consensually experimented-on today who speak out.

We see evidence of this malicious campaign today in publications such as The New York Times, The Washington Post, Mother Jones, The Daily Beast, Rational Wiki, Wikipedia and other mainstream rags. But most—not all—alternative media also refuse to acknowledge the very existence of this crime. You’ve stated, not just about this but crime in general, “By owning/controlling the media, criminals avoid open challenge.” What have you learned about journalists regarding this particular cover-up?

Paul Baird: Yes, as you say, the CIA-controlled MSM as well as the marginalised media, even publications like Nexus, refuse to run anything but the most derogatory items on TIs. The New York Times, Washington Post, and other misinformation strongholds, in particular, have attacked some of our better campaigners after luring them into an interview situation. They run with some mass hysteria line and ignore that all the targets have done something to annoy the PTB. Personally, I would never even talk with these snakes and this is the first interview I’ve ever given, and that’s only being done because I’m convinced that you understand the issues and are totally sympathetic.

Look, as ex-CIA director William Colby admitted: “The CIA controls everyone of importance in the major media”. They’re not going to rat on themselves, nor will they help an agency-target or anyone attempting to expose crimes of the corporate/military/political conglomerate. Those entering the MSM sort of sell their souls on matters like this and are brainwashed into believing it’s justifiable, and that they couldn’t do anything about it anyway. They’re all scared when confronted on this. It’s also all covered by bogus National Security legislation, so they lean on that as another excuse when there aren’t any real excuses, just criminal delusions fostered by elitists.

And sections of the media don’t just acquiesce on all of this and attack those trying to highlight it, they actively take part in harassing TIs. In fact, in my own case, and that of others who’ve been targeted by the entertainment industry villains, the attacks can be overwhelming and brutal….I see the MSM media as evil traitors and criminals.

Marginalised journalists and MSM execs, presenters that do not approve told me that surveillance results can be handed over with a “Find a place for this on tonight’s news/current affairs” -type instruction. Surveillance frequencies can be handed to stations. Direct computer to teleprompter connections can be arranged. The target is oppressed and discredited if they tell anyone, but this practice is as old as eavesdropping and predates all the technologies that aid today’s elite criminal. Again, insiders don’t care for the truth, only ego, income, and celebrity.

Hearing Voices, the Neurophone, and What Neurologists Know

Ramola D:I’d like to focus a bit on the issue of hearing voices, which many of those being assaulted with covert and classified technologies report, often as “synthetic telepathy” or the military term,Voice to Skull or V2K. Evidence for this military technology has been provided on FOIA request, and can be seen in patents.

Reporting such technologically-induced voices as evidence of covert neuroweapon assault to local law enforcement or physicians, still, today, ends with the target being taken to a Psych Ward and shot up with neuroleptics and anti-psychotics, essentially being disbelieved, dismissed, and discredited as mentally ill, schizophrenic, and hallucinatory.

This is absurd, because there are many known and patented technologies today to induce voices in people’s heads, such as the Frey effect, the microwave hearing effect, and bone conduction—which whistleblowers and scientists have also spoken about, and some of which are beginning to see coverage in mainstream media–but the Neurophone predates them all, and was used as a Voice of God weapon during the Iraq war, according to many analysts. What is so important about the Neurophone?

Paul Baird: Neurophone technology is the basis for developments that see many targeted people fielding personal “broadcasts” from Spy Central. From ignorant police and medicos to complicit journos and MPs, any discussion of this can lead to the complainant being institutionalised.

The device was invented in 1958, and was classified soon after. The developments from direct to remote, to vehicles, to satellites which deliver it via laser (slower sound riding faster directional light over the insignificant distance from a geo-synchronously-orbiting Deeper Space satellite to the Earthly target) followed.

It was used by spies for silent communication (no touching ear pieces, etc.), to drive Iraqi soldiers out of bunkers, to fire up and delude Manchurian candidates, and to discredit and/or institutionalise many political targets. It is subtly referred to in many songs.

It is the only term in our repertoire that cannot be denigrated, misrepresented, covered with other meanings or used elsewhere. There are countless pages of web site listings on the word, yet it still remains out of all dictionary listings, because the psych’ branding of sufferers as mad is central to the oppression of the righteous. On top of that, the reaction I get from perps/Government infiltrators in our midst is out of proportion. If others knew of it (even audiologists etc.,) it would become known world-wide, and the secrecy and misuse over 50 years would come out.

The education of people as to the existence of Neurophone technology and its development is one way we CAN break through. Other terminologies can be attacked. Other devices don’t have such specific names and cannot be actually bought from a real inventor who is still alive.

Ramola D:You have spoken with several neuroscientists on this subject, how have they reacted, when told of these technologies to remotely induce voices in people’s heads? I would think it’s very important to have psychiatrists communicate with neuroscientists, and vice versa, so psychiatrists begin to understand that hearing voices can no longer be considered symptomatic exclusively of schizophrenia.

Paul Baird: My experiences talking to brain experts indicate that they see all of this as interesting and say things like “Where can I get hold of these technologies”, that’s if they aren’t already involved. In other words, the humanitarian aspect is lost on them and all they see is New Science. They are part of the problem, not the solution. That’s not to say honest, caring ones don’t exist, and cannot be found, just that it would be difficult with the “Year/Decade/Century of the Brain” brigade.

My preferred target, based on positive feedback and confessions from the profession, would be NEUROLOGISTS. Many know. Some sympathise. Any that say they’re not interested (especially in a device like a NEUROphone) are liars. Any and all neurologists would be interested and they, in turn, could be used to convince others. The extraordinary efforts and manpower used to stop me telling an entire conference room full of neurologists is evidence enough for me…This avenue, like Net films, is a concern to “them” because it may work.

Challenging the inexact science of psychiatry with neuroscience is what I’m on about too. Neurologists know. If they would just relay that, then the psych’ profession could not ignore it.

Ramola D:When you say Neurologists, I presume you don’t mean Neuroscientists (as above/brain researchers)? (Correct me if I’m wrong.). And are you serious, have you actually met brain researchers who professed immediate interest (in technologies that could remote-target brains)? That would suggest that a majority of researchers are Not focused on the humane or ethical aspects of brain research? That seems huge in itself–can you elaborate?

Paul Baird: I use Neuroscience to mean the branch of medicine/science dealing with the nervous system and the brain. Its practitioners are neurologists. I see neurologists as just one of many groups that deal with brain disorders. Neuroscience is the broader field they operate under and that can include psychiatry, pharmacology, biochemistry and so on. And, yes, I’m always serious on the topic of covert harassment…The flippant “Where do I get it?” type responses are there but I don’t even recall the names, as once I hear that sort of inhumane response, I dismiss the person; I’m looking for compassionate, knowledgeable people, not corrupt or uncaring, would-be criminals. The names of those honest neurologists who knew or quickly accepted the truth are logged, but must remain concealed unless and until they choose to come forward; though some are briefly mentioned on my web site.

Ramola D: So generally speaking, one would think all neurologists today should be interested in learning about what TIs are experiencing? And a Neurophone would be of interest to all, you’d think? Did you want to elaborate on that experience of being stopped from telling a conference full of neurologists about the Neurophone?

Paul Baird: The Neurophone is a device that allows non-verbal communication as signals directed at the body to travel the nervous system and register in the brain–by-passing normal hearing mechanisms. It is attuned to the individual bio-electronic resonance frequency of the target, and so is not heard by others in the signal’s path. For any neurologist to say they neither know of nor care about knowing of such a device would be clear evidence of corruption or knowledge.

Indeed, for any specialist, be they neurologists or psychiatrists etc., to say they’re not interested in any device that allows signals to travel the human nervous system must raise suspicion of complicity. Like a corrupt cop who says he has no interest in learning of a new crime technique, it would be more than suspicious. The Psych’ professionals are almost all corrupt, many are involved but not the neurologists.

Sometime in the early ’90s, I attended a huge Neurologists’ convention at the Sydney Hilton. Expecting to be unable to speak directly to the attendees, I brought flyers in envelopes addressed to each attendee and posted them on the giant notice board. The names and permission to do this had been given to me by the organisers, who later told me that when I left, many men in black suits filed in and took one each. None of them were conference attendees who remained in the hall at the time. Consequently, not one received my posting. When I started contacting them individually, I found that many knew of the research, the Neurophone, the brain-wave scanning and brain-wave interpretation software.

Example 1: One admitted he had been harassed for inventing his own Neurophone, and offered to use hospital scanning equipment to scan targets–people who were being interfered with by remote technologies. The hospital equipment could only be accessed for official research so 40 targeted people would be needed as volunteers to be able to call the testing a research project and thus gain access to the oscillating scanners. He warned that if the monitors interfered with brainwave signals during scanning, which they could easily do, that he would be obliged to report anyone whose brainwave patterns matched those of known criminals on file. The risk was assessed by both of us as too high so we told no one.

(Personally, I believe that part of the framing we suffer includes bogus brainwave results that they fudge). The neurologist was later offered a job at Sydney University’s Centre for The Mind which studies creativity, facial expressions, and such, and is supported by Richard Branson, Peter Adams, Baz Lurman,The Dalai Lama and others. At this point this neurologist’s attitude was corrupted, and he claimed that not everything about such human research is black and white but grey. Potentially one of our greatest supporters, and a man who had offered so much hope over so many discussions, had been compromised and was lost to us.

Example 2: Another neurologist shared that illegal human research (non-consensual) had been going on for years. She said they used to hide brain-wave scanners in computer screens and wall cavities in neurologists’ offices, and would illegally scan patients’ brain-waves for research. Today, she said, the US military scans brain-waves from satellites, and does most of the research themselves. She feared for her job/life and told me to never use her name, though I could repeat what she had told me.

Challenging the inexact science of psychiatry with neuroscience is what I’m on about too. Neurologists know. If they would just relay that, then the psych’ profession could not ignore it.

The Criminal Silencing of Critics with Deadly Weaponry, Discrediting, and Psychiatry

Ramola D:Psychiatrists and doctors are being used to name victims mentally ill (schizoid or paranoid or both) if they report hearing voices or covert harassment on the street, or airplane/helicopter stalking, being followed, being swarmed in stores, etc.

In essence though, psychiatrists are co-operating with the State in diagnosing victims as schizoid and helping to cover up this Crime-With-Technology. In the US and Europe, victims can be committed to institutions by such psychiatrists. Have you spoken with psychiatrists and neuropsychiatrists, what have you learned?

Paul Baird: Yes. Most scientists have no interest in ethics or human rights. Some others have organised groups to look into that. Professional prostitution or a “guns for hire” approach is common across many professions. Over 60% of people will now do whatever they’re told for money or advantage according to the CIA. “It is appallingly obvious that our technology has exceeded our humanity.” Albert Einstein.

Psychiatrists’ bread-and-butter diagnoses include schizophrenia; only an honest, intelligent, brave one with little ego would accept the truth. Voices in the head are their favourite money spinner–and who supplies much of that money? The government, elite employers, etc.

It is very dangerous to speak to psychiatrists, especially if they’re corrupt. Even the best ones will accept stalking, harassment, and victimisation scenarios but draw the line at hearing voices broadcast from Spook Central.

Ramola D:You’ve stated that this is class warfare, where people in power use criminal tactics of silencing potential critics with deadly weaponry, and Media helps by ruthlessly suppressing and ridiculing targets’ testimonials, while also attacking them with the information gained from constant surveillance, “Surveillance Results”–could you expand on that?

Paul Baird: The elite all know. MPs, celebrities, “businessmen”, senior military personnel, etc. They salve their consciences on the conspiracy of silence by rabbiting the CIA line that it’s a matter of National Security. They know who’s in the wrong but just don’t care. Remember, the CIA sifts and places people for the shadow government, selecting from that 60% I keep referring to. For example: A rep’ of the top security firm here told me that the “Word is out to wash our hands of you”–the Pontius Pilate approach. Having all sold their souls with their silence and complicity, the elitists do what they can to discredit the innocent. The prince of lies controls their hearts and minds.

From Surveillance Issues.com:

Legal Aide: “It’s common for corporate criminals to covertly harass and blacklist people and many of them wind up on the street. They enjoy seeing that as they present as hopeless/mad. I’m only using this job as a stepping-stone and have a family. If I try to help any of those I know they did this to or spill the beans, my career will stall.”

Lawyer/Partner: “We’ve discussed it and would dearly like to help, but if we do, “They” will come at us from the side; we’ll lose all clients from any connected source, and that means we’d be out of business.”

Neuro Surveillance: Celebrities and Public Figures Both Controlled and Complicit

Ramola D:You’ve said that celebrities and public figures are also controlled by threat of use of these technologies against them. Many are also used, via Surveillance Results, via television, radio, film, to further harass targets. What do you think public figures know about all of this and why won’t they help?

Paul Baird: As for what celebrities know: This is again what I’ve brought to the table time and time again, but no-one wants to hear it. I’ve been hit by these people for decades and met some of them, some others who work for them, and many others who’ve been similarly hit. Most celebs are chosen, through agency vetting and syndicate approval, and are in that 60% I told you about. They have no editorial control, especially the journalists, and just present what they’re told to BUT they know of the targeting and, over time, if they hit the same targets, they’re in on the joke/crime.

The whole “don’t trust public figures” thing is so hard to relay in the age of celebrity worship that it’s frustrating. There are fence-sitting celebrities who don’t really approve of all this surveillance and oppression, but see it differently to you and I; as a sort of necessary trade-off. So many subtly refer to V2K and mind-reading technologies. With many, many songs mentioning “voices in my head” and “reading minds”, with the colloquial references used as covers if and when they are asked.

What am I saying? It’s back to that 60% thing again. 60% of people will do as they’re told, so the selections are made from that pool of talent, and the other 40% are shunted out.

In the case of public figures, Satan, through his minions, exacts the surveillance price from celebrities and they accept it because: that’s what they do for a living, and if they don’t do it, some lesser talent will take their place and do it anyway. Pretty much the same defence you’d get from hired assassins, give or take some large egos.

As for the price they pay (covert surveillance above the papparazzi thing being a big part of it): they pay a price, but their silence on the matter means that others also pay that same price with nothing to counter-balance it; all of us are also monitored, etc., because they remain silent. So we all pay, and only they benefit.

I say we all stand up and tell, and to hell with the monitors and their technology; it’s undemocratic, immoral, and criminal, and no government has a mandate to do it or allow it to be done.

The Few Exceptions: “Too Afraid to Do More”

Ramola D:So: people in public office and in prominent positions in media are generally corruptible, or they would not have attained their office. This brings us to the present, to all the implications of Pizzagate, the dark stories of blackmail and pedophilia propping up people in public office. Have you met or know of any exceptions, and what is your feeling about corrupt people in power today—have things changed, do we have a greater chance of exposing them?

Paul Baird: Yes, I’ve met some exceptions; that’s where a lot of my information came from in the first place. However, they will not go public as their careers/lives may be in jeopardy. Around the time I was talking to PM Howard’s people, the chief AFP (Australian Federal Police) surveillance expert told me that even if the PM were to try to help a targeted person, that he would be out of office that same day; one way or another. Such is the power of those that foster this system of oppression.

The honest/brave ones that helped a lot were mainly State and Federal Police, ex-spies and such — a few ex-politicians, TV presenters, TV/radio execs, and presenters were honest and supportive, but they were too afraid to do more than that.

Could Pizzagate and Pedogate Help Expose High-Tech Targeting?

Ramola D:What do you think about the connections of high-placed criminals to Pizzagate today, and the exposure of pedophilia/Satanism, etc.? Ted Gunderson and others have spoken about child trafficking and abuse, and many researchers have written about Satanism in the security and Intelligence agencies. Any chance, you think, that the exposure of this evil will help expose high-tech targeting as well?

Paul Baird: There’s always a chance, I suppose, but I tend to think that pedophilia in elitist circles is so out of control that it’s spilling out into the public arena. So many celebrites are caught up in rings or personal situations that there are two LA law firms that deal with nothing but celeb’ pedo’ cases or sexual-harassment-type matters. I personally see how we protect our children as a gauge of how well society is progressing. At the moment we are in a very sick, disgraceful place.

“The Ability of Government to Classify Crime is What Must be Fought.”

Ramola D:Going back to classified crime: I would think any victim of such “classified” assault on their bodies and brains would agree with this statement of yours:

“Classifying” information and calling it a matter of National Security negates the need for the criminals involved to even create excuses for their conduct. The ability of government to classify crime is what must be fought.”

Yet this is crime that malingers in shadows, that is systemically being protected and covered-up. How can such crime be exposed, and how can the classifying of such crime be fought?

Paul Baird: That’s the big question, isn’t it. Exec. Order 13526 is supposed to outlaw the classifying of matters to hide crime, yet it happens every day.

(a) In no case shall information be classified, continue to be maintained as classified, or fail to be declassified in order to:

(1) conceal violations of law, inefficiency, or administrative error; (2) prevent embarrassment to a person, organization, or agency; (3) restrain competition; or (4) prevent or delay the release of information that does not require protection in the interest of the national security.

To stop it, we need advice from National Security experts. However, the governments employ most of them, creating a conflict of interest in much the same way that the MSM makes sure it uses all media lawyers to create the same conflict. Those few experts left charge too much for targeted people to afford and, as we all know, you only get the justice you can afford. The elitist criminal will always price you out on civil matters and hide on criminal ones. That’s why 98% of crime (mostly white-collar crime) goes unpunished.

Ramola D:Finally, several initiatives supported by your extensive writing and reportage and run by Dr. Nick Begich and Lynn Surgalla of the US Psychotronics Association made great headway in 1999 at the European Parliament and UNIDIR (United Nations Institute for Disarmament Research) in creating legislation banning the use of weapons to remotely manipulate humans. Yet they were not enforced, and were indeed fully ignored by the US Government. What can we do today to once more bring this vital issue to international attention?

The European Parliament and UNIDIR, in recognising our concerns, did mention Weapons of Mass Destruction but grouped it all into a category called “Weapons for Human Manipulation” and that’s what they wanted banned.

The point I often make about the US, which all countries know rules the planet but they dare not spell out how, is that UN Weapons Inspectors and various “Inspector Generals” etc. are nigh on impotent when it comes to the US stockpile of Weapons of Mass Destruction and covert, classified weapons. It’s as if all other countries are potential villains but not the country in the best position to be just that, and which commits more crimes against humanity than any other. This exclusion from scrutiny is one of the ways you can tell how tightly the US fist holds the reins of power worldwide. Equally, they can bolster and expand their National Security laws to cover concealing, spying, harassing re. the entire planet, but anyone else that tried that would be denounced as criminals by the CIA-controlled Media.

Again, National Security laws and the inability of UN Weapons Inspectors to study evil, classified technologies are, for me, two of the biggest obstacles we face.

With the MSM controlled by the CIA and the US government clearly behind all of this, only public education, through the marginalised media, can get the result we need.

Ramola D:Any other thoughts on how collective humanity can end these horrific elitist criminal practices of covert EMF weapon and neuro-tech assault?

Paul Baird: Can I just emphasize that despite the various other angles to all of this–the oppression, the experiments (AI, Dream Studies, Mind Control, Brain Studies, etc., etc.) that there is clearly a Eugenics angle as well. Much like their Nazi predecessors, these people not only want to disable us and put us in a mobile concentration camp and run their evil experiments, they also want to remove all trait combinations from the gene pool that lead to the make up of those who provide resistance to their evil operations–curiosity. persistence, honesty, spirituality, etc. I know of no targeted person that had children after the stressful harassment started, and most would see their offspring would also suffer if they did. Like Poles, gays, Jews and others during WWII, today the ethical, compassionate, and law-abiding are also in danger of extermination.

Only by exposing these practices can we end them. We need to work at finding ways to let the general population know that they live not in democracies but totalitarian/fascist states and (that they must work) to restore true democracy.

Finally, the answers lie with the marginalised media and articles prepared by people like yourself, Ramola. If enough people can learn of these atrocities through such writings, then pressure can be brought to bear on the powers that be to stop what is effectively a silent holocaust: the remote incarceration, torture, experimentation, and extermination of people of integrity who have the temerity to challenge elite crime.

With much gratitude to Paul Baird for this singular interview, conducted over a long period and several emails. Please visit Surveillance Issues for more information.

“We will seek friendship and goodwill with the nations of the world, but we do so with the understanding that it is the right of all nations to put their own interests first.

We do not seek to impose our way of life on anyone, but rather to let it shine as an example.

We will shine for everyone to follow.”

–President Donald J. Trump, Inauguration Day Address, 1/20/2017

Memorandum on Domestic US Torture Programs

Running Under Cover of Surveillance

Covert US Military/Intel/Justice Physical Mutilation of the Population

EMF Weapons, Neuro-Weapons, Bio-Terrorism, & Organized Stalking

Date: 25 January 2017

To President Donald J. Trump

Dear Mr. President,

We unite in asking you to act to terminate immediately the ongoing covert programs of Electronic Warfare and COINTELPRO-based domestic terrorism that are currently being run by the US Intelligence agencies, US Military, US Homeland Security, and their contractors in the name of Electronic “Surveillance” and National Security against the American population.

As you enter this office for the first week, it is possible the Deep State and unelected shadow government that apparently hovers behind all those elected to the government of the United States will present these covert programs to you as normative Intelligence and surveillance activity necessary for the preservation of National Security.

As Intelligence analysts, human rights activists, advocates, whistleblowers, writers, scientists, victims, and highly productive and accomplished members of society with varied science, arts, and humanities backgrounds in critical thinking, systems analysis, engineering, education, healthcare, law, and Intelligence, we are here to inform you otherwise: These are NOT normative Intelligence and Surveillance activities. Using the deadly weapons of Electronic Warfare, these are organized Terror programs, committing the most horrific crimes and human rights violations, causing grievous bodily harm to countless numbers of innocent citizens.

Surveiling and assaulting neither terrorists nor spies but the best and brightest, most productive, and most accomplished Americans, as well as whistle-blowers and activists, these programs seriously destabilize our civil society, are at risk of irreversibly degenerating the economic output of our country, and have already become our most shameful export abroad.

Situation On the Ground in Continental USA

Thanks to the trillions of dollars poured annually into Covert Operations funding, the carte blanche given to Intelligence and Military agencies, both pre- and post-911, and the convenience of classification and concealment of all manner of dubious activities as necessary for National Security, fraud, waste, and corruption at the highest levels of Government is now endemic. Corrupt factions in Intelligence agencies and in Military departments are now openly committing war crimes and crimes against humanity in acts of direct enmity against the American people.

In the name of the War on Terror, a superior trafficking operation has been unleashed by the US Military, Department of Homeland Security, and the CIA on American citizens:

Current military and Intelligence directives (5240.1R, the NDAA, EO 12333, and the CIA’s AR 2-2) together permit the US military to detain citizens indefinitely, and to use those Americans “under surveillance” for experimentation purposes. This is used for an outright, public enslavement and torture of a large fraction of the US population.

The creation of Joint Targeting operations, Fusion Centers, Regional Information and Sharing Systems (RISS) programs with privatized Intelligence centers, as well as “Community Policing” and “Neighborhood Watch” initiatives have permitted a network of immoral and depraved operatives from Law Enforcement, the Intelligence agencies, and the military, using the guise of “national security” to conduct financially rewarding no-holds-barred human testing for the pharma, surveillance, and weapons industries, as well as to live out their personal sadism and depravity. It is a telling characteristic that the victims of these crimes are 70-80% women. The sex ratio is indicative of sexual violence and war crimes.

Meanwhile, an ever increasing army of civilian, quasi “Law Enforcement” personnel, sometimes taken from the dregs of society, is being trained, round the clock and used in set-up 24/7 operations, on those innocent Americans being targeted.

In the name of the War on Terror, and masquerading as necessary Electronic Surveillance, condoned and orchestrated by US Homeland Security and the US Department of Justice, the most deadly weapons of Electronic Warfare are being routinely used on civilians under so-called surveillance inside their own homesincluding:

These are military weapons of war, designed to incapacitate, degrade, and destroy human organs, nerves, bodies, and brains; they are further being used inhumanely, in non-stop, 24/7 scenarios of attack.

In addition, CIA/DIA/DARPA/NSA agents also run covert interrogation exercises, mind control operations, and behavior modification programs (extensions of MK ULTRA and the original Nazi death-camp experiments) on their brains.

A vast apparatus of sophisticated stealth Electronic Warfare and Signals Intelligence equipment carried on planes, drones, helicopters, satellites, cell towers, ground-vehicles—and involving the complicity of all Intelligence agencies, such as the NRO, NGSA, and Federal agencies such as the FAA and NASA is being used for this purpose.

Those being hit with Electronic Warfare weapons are also being subjected daily to COINTELPRO actions or “Zersetzung”—organized stalking, crowding, mobbing, obstructing, brighting, flashing, noise harassment carried out by the FBI’s Infragard, as well as US Neighborhood Watch groups.

These are joint US Military and Intelligence programs of domestic torture, hidden under cover of biometric surveillance, physical surveillance, and electronic surveillance by a cynical and corrupt Homeland Security/Department of Justice mechanism, which has permitted the use of cover-story labels to conceal the use of violence on American citizens.

In the name of the War on Terror, in 2017, American neighborhoods and communities have been transformed from calm, peaceful, and neighborly communities into predator vs. prey, i.e. divided holdouts of covert spying, snitching, Electronic Warfare, smear campaigns, and studied COINTELPRO attacks on neighbors, planned and coordinated through federal government-sponsored intelligence, information and command centers at the national and local levels, such as the Regional Information Sharing System (RISS), the U.S. Department of Justice, and the network of Fusion Centers.

At core of these attacks are the innocent Americans being wrongfully targeted and defamed as extremists, terrorists, spies, enemy combatants: often the most upright in communities, people of conscience and community spirit, integrity and accomplishment, entrepreneurship and creativity, innocence and impeccable character, people targeted not for their potential for criminality but for their innate power as attractors and disseminators of positive community influence.

The coterie of criminals from inside the FBI/DHS/CIA/NSA and local Law Enforcement and RISS centers involved in these programs openly lie in neighborhoods to name these innocents terrorists or spies,open investigations on innocents, start slander and defamation campaigns on innocents, and then corral whole communities into helping them surveil, spy, sabotage, and slander them, under threat of high fines and jail time.

By these means, whole lives are destroyed: employment is sabotaged, lies are circulated, and families are torn apart.

Neighbors become collaborators and complicit when they let Electronic Weapons operators freely enter their neighborhoods and homes, using their driveways and properties to install antennas and conduct tracking operations.

Collaborators are paid handsomely and bribed with home renovations, new cars, and tickets to luxury holidays and ball games. They are also trained in the operation of certain equipment, including cell phones to direct pulsed radiation attacks, which they now turn on their innocent neighbor.

This rewards and entrenches corrupt behavior in a manner that will utterly splinter and disintegrate our society for decades to come. Worst of all, this system of routine horrific abuses has developed a life of its own whereby ever more vindictive acts are committed and the perpetrators on the ground take free licence to do whatever they like at the expense of economically productive members in our society. Their excesses include electronic rape.

Psychiatry has been roped in as political tool to subjugate those reporting these programs by naming them delusional, a verdict that Law Enforcement and CIA-controlled media then run with.

It must be stressed that the national silence on this issue as well as the distortions of reportage we see in mainstream-media mention of “Targeted Individuals” who report abusive surveillance programs is directly related to the vampiric control of major media that the CIA exerts, and their deliberate promotion of deception in coverage, in order to keep these violent, mutilatory programs of Electronic Weapon use on citizens clandestine and concealed.

Corruption at the levels of Law Enforcement and the Department of Justice, and the use of weaponized psychiatry combined with indiscriminate smears and slander of the victims has prevented the situation from being remedied.

A Public Scandal Of International Proportions

This has now become a proliferating and self-perpetuating industry of premeditated, systematic mutilation of some of the most productive members of our society.

By getting rid of people of conscience and integrity, whistleblowers, and activists in communities—through these extreme means of public torture and humiliation—it appears that the covert operators in Intelligence and military agencies running these programs seek more and more to create docile, deceitful, and pliable populations, people who will believe the official lie, people who will turn on their own friends and neighbors, people who will assist in stoning the innocent to death.

The extent and sadism of these deliberate bodily and brain assaults—which essentially involve the use of military weapons of war on peaceful, non-combatant, unarmed civilians, peacefully residing in their own country–amount to crimes against humanity being perpetrated against the American people.

And sadly, these Nazi death-camp programs of torture have become USA’s most prominent export along with our bombs, missiles, and drones.

To the disgrace of all Law-Enforcement, victims have been pleading for support publicly on social media for years. By now, the situation has gone beyond a disgrace and has become a public scandal of international proportions that is threatening the stability of our societies. Without a doubt, this problem is destroying the best and brightest in our nation and will inevitably affect the economic and creative capabilities of the US. This already sets us back in the race with other nations and seriously exposes the US to the danger of a hostile takeover.

Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.

The scam goes like this, random people, or people who are dissidents or whistleblowers are purposely mislabeled as “terrorists” and put on an Enemies List, which is then turned over to Defense Contractors to target under perverted interpretations of NDAA and PAA.

This allows them to engage the Military and Law Enforcement in either the active harassment and torture of individuals illegally targeted for fraudulent cause, or it gives the Defense Contractors carte blanche to commit criminal assault upon innocent citizens while demanding (unconstitutionally) that Police stand down and do nothing to help their victims.

Please Act Now To Stop These Crimes Against Humanity in the USA and Worldwide

To stop these crimes against humanity we, the undersigned, request that you immediately:

Stop all of these surveillance, testing, and experimentation programs.

Stop and revoke all mandates permitting the US military to test weapons on citizens.

Repeal and revoke all civil and military directives which permit non-consensual experimentation on Americans.

Call out the National Guard to confiscate all portable EMF-weapons and radar/sonic/scalar surveillance devices, and haul off to prison anyone – including Feds, law enforcement, etc., found with them as they violate many many sections of 18 USC in regard to weapons of mass destruction.

Freeze all programs of surveillance being run by any and every agency in the DOJ and Homeland Security apparatus.

Force the open publication of the list of names of all people who have been targeted with organized stalking, EMF and neuroweapons by agencies at the federal, state, and local level for the past thirty years.

Compel disclosure of the medical parameters of these classified, covert, special access surveillance and torture programs from all Universities and research institutions, all Defense and Intelligence contractors, departments, and agencies.

Compel disclosure to each victim of his/her file containing what experiments have been conducted, what has been injected or implanted, what nanotechnology has been administered, and provide immediate, fully-compensated medical help in scanning/implant removal, radiation-damage treatment, & taking other medical/health measures against the long-term consequences of these crimes.

Fully re-imburse to victims all medical costs and family funeral expenses sustained during the course of these torture programs, and plan to provide continuous compensation for all victims’ health expenses until death.

Cut funding for all surveillance programs currently being run on named American citizens.

Cut all covert operations funding for any and every agency, in particular the CIA.

Compel mainstream media to fully and openly detail these programs of torture on citizens.

Root out all personnel employed in these programs, starting from the top.

Set in motion a Congressional investigation, to fully uncover and disclose details of these programs.

Dismantle all agencies and military groups whose record shows shameless participation in these crimes against humanity.

Work closely with your counterparts and with agencies abroad to ensure the same results of restoration of human rights and freedoms, worldwide.

These crimes against humanity need to be stopped if the United States of America wants to retain its national resilience and keep the goodwill of its partners worldwide.

You have an opportunity today to set right many historic wrongs. Much is made of America’s history of slavery. Yet this reality on the ground today shows us, that with the stealth weapons of Electronic Warfare and Neurowarfare, slavery has entered a new phase.

You have said:

“There should be no fear — we are protected, and we will always be protected.

We will be protected by the great men and women of our military and law enforcement and, most importantly, we are protected by God.

…We will make America safe again.”

–President Donald J. Trump, Inauguration Day Address, 1/20/2017

But there are NO laws on the books today in the USA—land of the free and home of the brave—to prevent non-consensual experimentation on humans. Americans today are enslaved and are exporting this medieval travesty into every corner of the world.

Your children and grandchildren are just as much at risk as ours.

Please act today to put an end to these horrific, shameful crimes against humanity which are tearing apart our society.

Cheryl Weinrich, VA, USAFormer employee of SAIC, Inc., Employed from 2000 to 2010.Contracted out 2009-’10 as a Document Control Specialist and Courier with the Missile Defense Agency.Former student at Northern Virginia Community College, Annandale and Alexandria, VA, 1982 to 2000: Travel and Tourism, Psychology and Information Technology.

Dianne Renee ChandlerB.B.A. Business AdministrationM.S.S. Strategic Studies, U.S. Army War CollegeM.S. Acquisition and Contract ManagementLTC , USAR retired Veteran 28 years Service tortured victim since 2012 after filing an EEO complaint Dianne Chandler vs. Secretary of the Army John M. McHugh

Linda L. Jensen (Maiden name, Christopherson/first marriage, Vegoe)Musician, poet, educator of young people, legal and medical secretary, missionary, mother, grandmother, gardener.Also an author, and activist for the rights of individuals for justice, “life, liberty and pursuit of happiness” in accordance with the Declaration of Independence of the United States of America.

Tera Wills, Ph.D, College Professor, USAPh.D. in combination of Nuclear Engineering and Radiochemistry, University of Arkansas (40 years in US/from Iran) Targeted since 2012

Liuda Balcius, USA/LithuaniaAuthor, Blind Social Worker, Teacher of the Blind, Humanitarian and AdventurerBlind victim of reprehensible directed energy weaponsand unconscionable chemical poisonings for more than 20 years.Looking forward someday to a peaceful, private life without pain and torture.

Catherine (Kate) Ryan, R.N. RetiredFormer Representative in Consumer ElectronicsActivist/Whistleblower of an Extraordinary Rendition site in Italy, inappropriate planned disposal of PCBs through insert in bathroom tiles.SOA Watch/Supporter, Runs Support Group for TIs in New England

(An updated version of this memo, on an ongoing basis, will be maintained on this page at The Everyday Concerned Citizen. Please send an email anytime to ramolad@hushmail.com if you wish to sign this memo. Please share this information — which is being suppressed by corporate, mainstream, CIA-controlled media — widely. Stand up for America today, and for all of humanity worldwide, add your name, and inform others. These crimes Must be publicized the world over, and publicly addressed. )

While analysts of previous false flag events and manufactured terrorism rally online this week to share analysis and commentary on the recent creation-of-chaos-and-terror shooting event on January 6 at Fort Lauderdale Airport in Florida, and while oddly McCarthyist frenzy mounts in mainstream CIA-controlled media to blame Russia for the hacked DNC and Clinton/Podesta emails released by Wikileaks–blowing the cover on a worldwide child trafficking operation now named Pedogate (a huge subject to be considered here separately shortly), reminders that we are surrounded by criminal Lies and Liars in high places surface all around us.

Luckily for the awakened and aware among us, there are several commentators speaking out, and as we step further into 2017, it seems like the holy water of Truth on all sides can no longer be held back, will no longer be held back, and will spill, despite manic attempts at “Leak Control” by those–in government, and particularly in the global and national Intelligence Community–who have been and seem to believe that they can continue to suppress, oppress, tyrannize, and endlessly deceive us. But not for much longer–if these avalanches of truth have anything to do with it.

“They say, “with high confidence”–now that’s the first clue that they don’t have a shred of evidence that it’s true. Because if they claim some confidence level, that means they don’t have the evidence…unless they present it so you can look at it and say, is this beyond a reasonable understanding or point that would allow you to say, yeah, they probably did it..?…The point that I’ve been trying to make, on television and so on is, NSA should have a record. If it was a hack coming in across the network, NSA’s got a record of it. And if they transferred data out, and then transferred that data across electronically to Wikileaks, then they should have a record of that also.

Because they have so many collection points–they have tens of thousands of access points in the network that collect and sort data….They’ve deployed hundreds of trace route programs in the European area, that means they can trace the route of every packet that’s sent across the network–billions of them everyday. So the point is they should at least have a fragment–they might not show every packet that went to Wikileaks from the Russians but they should have some of them…

The real issue is, who passed the data to Wikileaks? It’s not how many people tried to hack the DNC, because every country in the world tries to hack everything that’s available in the US–China, Israel, everybody! And we hack everybody else too–so hacking is done worldwide by everybody. That’s not the issue. The issue is, who passed the data to Wikileaks?…And so far, no one has produced a shred of evidence to show that anyone who has attempted that, which would probably be the major countries in the world, hacked the DNC and any other…Hillary, as Secretary of State, was a prime target for all governments around the world, so you know they were trying to get to her–so it’s not a question of who’s hacking who, because everybody’s hacking everybody! The question is, who passed the data to Wikileaks?” –William Binney

In other words, this most respected former NSA Technical Director and crack mathematician and cryptographer at the NSA is informing us there is no way a Russian hack and leak could Not have been picked up by routine NSA telecommunication protocols, in some material form, in some very concrete and definitive ways, had there really been one. To spell it out: the whole thing’s a lie. The allegation a lie, the “high degree of confidence” a lie, the earnest demeanor a lie, the joint Intelligence community leadership stance before the Senate Intelligence Committee a lie.

“They’re always trying to divert attention from the main issue, the central core issues, the government’s always trying to do that–it’s like the Wizard of Oz, we’re not supposed to pay attention to the man behind the curtain–and that’s really the theme here, always being diverted to something that’s not relevant.”–William Binney

In response to Mr. Scheer’s noting that NSA would probably bring up “the compromising of methods and sources of gathering intelligence” (also a favorite CIA excuse) as an excuse for not providing detailed evidence, Mr. Binney goes on to say:

“Methods and sources are already compromised, they’re already on the Web. All you have to do is Google things like NSA and Treasure Map or NSA and any of the muscular programs–the Bull Run program or the internal tapping programs; you’ll see a lot of them referenced there though–Fair View, Storm Brew, Blarney; that gets involving all the companies in the US–service providers for the Internet, the phone companies, all–30 of them total, according to the Blarney slides–are participating with them, sharing all this data and information with NSA–so, you know, the data has already been out there…we’ve spent tens of billions of dollars every year to pick this data up.”–William Binney

Most revealing beyond that, for all of us interested in truth, transparency, and accountability in government, is the succeeding exchange, where Mr. Scheer emphasizes the aspect of Mr. Binney making these statements with “their terminology–with high confidence, as somebody who was inside the system,” an insider who has worked at the NSA, and Mr. Binney responds:

“I mean, I know they lie to each other internally too–the whole system runs on Lies.”

“What do you mean, they lie to each other?”

“Yes. They lie to each other, in terms of what–why they want something done, or what they’re doing with certain money, internally; they move money around from program to program–and they don’t tell each other, they just take it, you know–and they lie to Congress all the time, they would have meetings before they talk to Congress saying, “What’s our story, our corporate position here?” So they would tell their corporate position. This is within the NSA.

This is what I call: Oversight is a joke.

Because the only thing they get fed is data they agree to tell them. They don’t tell them the truth. So, they’re lying to everybody. Why, they lie to Congress, they lie to the public, it’s a continuation of that foundation of lying.” –William Binney

And “Real News” by the independent online media is now tagged as Russian propaganda.

What we are dealing with is a War against the Truth.

Concepts are turned upside down.

Political insanity prevails. We are at a dangerous crossroads in our history The dangers of global warfare are routinely obfuscated by media disinformation.”–Professor Michel Chossudovsky

Because deception is being “legalized” by Executive Order and by the NDAA, the Intelligence Community perhaps believes it is acceptable to run an endless series of deadly Psy Ops which include Active Shooter drills and enacted acts of terror which double ultimately as real terror productions, since communities and populations are indeed being terrorized.

This video blogger and Fort Lauderdale airport employee who handed in her resignation immediately following the airport shooting on the basis of her understanding that the entire shooting was a set-up, a false flag, an acted-out farce, but one with real repercussions of terror and endangerment on airport grounds, and Ole Dammegard, well-known investigator/reporter of false flags, interviewed by SGT Report, both highlight the essential role played by Intelligence agencies in this latest shooting, and in others.

Ole Dammegard, exploring both the Berlin truck attack and others, points to Freemason symbolism evident at the sites of these false flags, and states that those responsible for the creation and execution of these false flags are Intelligence agencies from a certain group of countries working together: the CIA, the Mossad, MI6, the French Intel group, and Saudi Arabian Intel.

In various interviews and analyses on Youtube and on his website, Ole Dammegard offers insights into the totalitarian, building-police-state rationale behind these apparently set-up and Psy Op-running events by this far-from-benign coterie of joint American, European, Israeli, and Saudi Arabian intelligence agencies.

Taking apart the crisis-actor, staged-response scenario as evident in news interviews shortly following the incident also is Zachary Hubbard, who is writing a book on false flags. Youtube has several independent analysts working on this, as this playlist shows.

Many of us understand today that these horrific events, purporting to stem from ISIS-inspired terrorists, that appear to have escalated post-9/11, are being inflicted on us with criminal intent to deceive—all in the interests of further stripping us of our basic human rights and natural freedoms, and of bolstering, expanding, and entrenching the Security state, the Surveillance state, the Secret-Police’d state. The language of “paranoid conspiracy theory” long foisted on us by a fully-controlled corporate media seeking to deceive no longer works on the awakened. To be able to see through the deception is an act of clarity, not paranoia.

Which brings us to this ever-present question of Operation Mockingbird and its continuance in our midst. Beyond the recorded ’50s-and-upward history of CIA-control of the media as explored by investigative journalists and researchers such as Carl Bernstein in ’77 and Alex Constantine in ’97, we are still looking today, in 2017, at a landscape of Intel-run media.

“Further investigation into the matter, CIA officials say, would inevitably reveal a series of embarrassing relationships in the 1950s and 1960s with some of the most powerful organizations and individuals in American journalism.

Among the executives who lent their cooperation to the Agency were William Paley of the Columbia Broadcasting System, Henry Luce of Time Inc., Arthur Hays Sulzberger of the New York Times, Barry Bingham Sr. of the LouisviIle Courier‑Journal, and James Copley of the Copley News Service. Other organizations which cooperated with the CIA include the American Broadcasting Company, the National Broadcasting Company, the Associated Press, United Press International, Reuters, Hearst Newspapers, Scripps‑Howard, Newsweek magazine, the Mutual Broadcasting System, the Miami Herald and the old Saturday Evening Post and New York Herald‑Tribune.

“In 1977, the New York Times ran a front-page story, detailing a worldwide propaganda effort, with direct CIA ownership of some 50 newspapers in the US and elsewhere. In 1977, the Copely News Service admitted to working closely with the Company—23 employees at Copely alone were full-time employees of the agency….One CIA despatch, dated April 1, 1967, declassified nine years later under FOIA, advised “assets” in the media on “Countering Criticism of the Warren Report.” Features and book reviews “are particularly appropriate for this purpose,” the CIA despatch observed….The CIA’s mouthpieces in the press were directed to emphasize: “No significant new evidence has emerged,” “there is no agreement among critics,” or the ever-popular, “Conspiracy on the large scale suggested would be impossible to conceal”. –Alex Constantine, p 42, Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Many of us understand today that The Washington Post, The New York Times, CNN, are compromised operations. How about NPR, Democracy Now, PBS, the Chicago Tribune, the Boston Globe, the Los Angeles Times, the Guardian? Is it possible that all mainstream media is compromised? Many researchers point in that direction. These analyses and articles spell it out for us.

Excerpt: 45. Former CIA case officer Robert David Steele states that CIA manipulation of news media is “worse” in the 2010s than in the late 1970s when Bernstein wrote “The CIA and the Media.” “The sad thing is that the CIA is very able to manipulate [the media]and it has financial arrangements with media, with Congress, with all others. But the other half of that coin is that the media is lazy.” James Tracy interview with Robert David Steele, August 2, 2014,

Given these facts, to what extent, really, can any of us believe anything that is published by these newspapers or broadcast on these networks? They’ve been “authorized” by the President and the NDAA and the CIA after all to spread Government propaganda (a.k.a Lies) like apple butter all over the place. Orwell’s Ministry of Truth is not really a new arrival, it’s been here all along apparently.

The Mind Control Psy Op and the CIA/DOD/NSA’s Interest in Denial of Contemporary Mind Control Experimentation

There are two Psy Ops in play here: the False Flag Psy Op—as explored above, and the Mind Control Psy Op.

What we’re being asked to believe, by the tenor of mainstream media coverage of Esteban Santiago, the supposed lone Fort Lauderdale shooter, as a sadly delusional, mentally-ill Army veteran given to hallucinations and sudden behavioral changes, possible victim of PTSD, who pulls out a gun to randomly shoot to kill in a public place, is that Mind Control experimentation and operations run by the CIA—which he purportedly reported, as personal experience—do not exist, could not exist, cannot be imagined to exist, and should, rightfully and rationally, only be ridiculed as impossible and implausible by the rest of us. The conditioned response we’re being led to espouse is that of the reasoning, science-minded skeptic: Mind Control by the CIA? Of course that’s a delusion. Off to the psychiatrist with his head!

Except:Every literate American—and citizen, worldwide–knows that Mind Control operations run by the CIA are not delusions.

Look up MK ULTRA—which became MK SEARCH, or look up PROJECT ARTICHOKE, PROJECT BLUEBIRD, MK DELTA. Read researcher John Marks’ book, The Search for a Manchurian Candidate, which expertly condenses hundreds of pages unearthed in the mid-70’s by the Rockefeller Commission along with interviews and other documentation into a few succinct chapters tracing the horrors of CIA Mind Control and Behavioral Control Experimentation run by psychopathic CIA doctors and crazed University academics (with then-CIA-head Richard Helms at the helm of this nefarious enterprise) in the deadly, unethical, and extreme use of toxic drugs, hallucinogens, electroshock, hypnosis, sensory deprivation, electromagnetic radiation attacks and other abuses, to create “the perfect agent” capable of forgetting whatever infamy the no-limits-CIA wished him or her to commit.

This historic background to Mind Control, of course, can today be researched extensively online and in books. Several investigative reporters and researchers have published books and articles on this subject, including Dr. Colin Ross, Walter Bowart, and others.

“The testing of drugs by the CIA was just a part of the United States government’s top-secret mind-control project, a project which had spanned thirty-five years and had involved tens of thousands of individuals. It involved techniques of hypnosis, narco-hypnosis, electronic brain stimulation, behavioral effects of ultrasonic, microwave, and low-frequency sound, aversive and other behavior modification therapies. In fact, there was virtually no aspect of human behavioral control that was not explored in their search for the means to control the memory and will of both individuals and whole masses of people.

The CIA succeeded in developing a whole range of psycho-weapons to expand its already ominous psychological warfare arsenal. With these capabilities, it was now possible to wage a new kind of war—a war which would take place invisibly, upon the battlefield of the human mind. … [p. 19]”–Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

“And, in 1974, the first victim of Parkinson’s disease treated by ESB walked gracefully out of a San Francisco hospital under his own power, thanks to portable ESB. He had a “stimoceiver” implanted in his brain … The “stimoceiver” which weighed only a few grams and was small enough to implant under his scalp, permitted both remote stimulation of his brain and the instantaneous telemetric recording of his brain waves. … [pp. 256-257]

And by the late 1960s, the “remote control” of the human brain—accomplished without the implantation of electrodes—was well on its way to being realized.

A research and development team at the Space and Biology Laboratory of the University of California at the Los Angeles Brain Research Institute found a way to stimulate the brain by creating an electrical field completely outside the head. Dr. W. Ross Adey stimulated the brain with electric pulse levels which were far below those thought to be effectual in the old implanting technique. … [p. 257]

In 1975 a primitive “mind reading machine” was tested at the Stanford Research Institute. The machine is a computer which can recognize a limited amount of words by monitoring a person’s silent thoughts. This technique relies upon the discovery that brain wave tracings taken with an electroencephalograph (EEG) show distinctive patterns that correlate with individual words—whether the words are spoken aloud or merely subvocalized (thought of).” –Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

MK ULTRA did not stop, either, in 1974 (when illegal domestic activities by the CIA in the investigation of Americans were exposed by Seymour Hersh and the subsequent enquiry and Rockefeller Commission set off some internal truth-telling at the CIA from more ethical CIA heads like James Schlesinger and William Colby, with the result that, despite Helms’ dastardly actions in destroying the most important records, some information on MK ULTRA’s projects and subprojects has come down to us); as many researchers note, it went underground—or more deeply undercover. This had been set in motion already, in the mid-’60s. In the words of intrepid researcher and reporter Alex Constantine, author of Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997):

“In the mid-1960s, the Langley spychologists feared exposure. Newspaper reporters had caught wind of Auschwitzean behavioral modification research funded by the government. Congress was asking questions. The thugs at Langley scratched their heads. It was only a matter of time before an inquisitive reporter exposed the rot of mind control.

The solution: CIA scientists bugged out of the laboratory. The experiments were moved into the community, hidden, like the flying saucers, in plain sight. Eccentric religious groups were organized or co-opted by intelligence operatives, including the People’s Temple, the Symbionese Liberation Army, Ordo Templis Otientis (OTO), Finders, Solar Temple, and the Bhagwan Shree Rajneesh Movement, among others.” –Alex Constantine, p 152, “Cult Abuse of Children and Mind Control Programming,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Studies of MK ULTRA and mind control today falsely assume that the experiments stopped after Congressional exposure, asserts Constantine:

“Most studies of Mind Control focus on experiments conducted 20-40 years ago—as if the CIA abandoned mind machines because a few loose secrets tumbled out in Congressional testimony. The clandestine operations branches are in fact very interested in EM brain manipulation. A 30-year lag yawns between declassified projects and the most advanced technology known to the American proletariat.

“Following public outrage, the CIA announced it had ceased its mind manipulation programmes. Victor Marchetti, a CIA veteran of 14 years who turned ‘whistle-blower’, exposed this to be untrue.

In 1977, Marchetti said the CIA claims to have ceased were a cover story. Under scrutiny, the agency were quick to downplay the success of MK-ULTRA – claiming no real advances were achieved. Miles Copeland, another long-serving CIA officer disputed this. Speaking to a reporter, Copeland revealed that ‘the congressional subcommittee which went into this sort of thing only got the barest glimpse’. Another source within the intelligence community says that after 1963, CIA efforts increasingly focused on psychoelectronics. Narcohypnosis had been drained dry.” –Richard G. Gall, Mind Control and MK ULTRA

Contemporary Non-Consensual Neuro/Mind Control experimentation Is Not a Chimera

From the mid-70s to the present time, word of MK ULTRA’s continuance has come to us in a steady stream from victim testimonials, reported by non-corporate journalists and researchers. Mind Control experimentation appears to have splintered in many directions and continued.

One of those directions, deriving from advances made in programming the minds of putative agents with hypnosis, pursued the powers of radio hypnosis, or subliminal hypnosis fed remotely into human brains via radio frequencies.

“In 1967 a writer named Lincoln Lawrence published a book … [Were We Controlled? presented] a sophisticated technique known as RHIC–EDOM … Radio Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control–Electronic Dissolution of Memory. …

“Under RHIC, a ‘sleeper’ can be used years later with no realization that the ‘sleeper’ is even being controlled! He can be made to perform acts that he will have no memory of ever having carried out. In a manipulated kind of kamikaze operation where the life of the ‘sleeper’ is dispensable, RHIC processing makes him particularly valuable because if he is detected and caught before he performs the act specified . . . nothing he says will implicate the group or government which processed and controlled him.” …

What really happened, according to Lawrence, was that during the operation a small electrode was implanted inside Oswald’s mastoid sinus. The electrode responded to a radio signal which would make audible, inside Oswald’s head, certain electronic commands to which he had already been posthypnotically conditioned to respond. …

In 1975 the RHIC–EDOM story surfaced again. … The journalist, James L. Moore, said that the papers in his possession described the details of “a military technique of mind-control called Radio-Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control–Electronic Dissolution of Memory.” …

According to Moore, in the initial (RHIC) stage of programming the … [person] is put into a deep hypnotic trance, and conditioned to go into trance at the sound of a specific tone. “A person may be placed under this control with or without his knowledge, programmed to perform certain actions and maintain certain attitudes” whenever he hears the tone. …

The second part of the process, electronic dissolution of memory (EDOM), Moore said, “… By electronically jamming the brain, acetylcholine creates static which blocks out sights and sounds. You would then have no memory of what you saw or heard; your mind would be a blank.” …

The claims of James L. Moore would sound fantastic were it not for the abundance of information to support the possibility of their validity. …” [pp. 261-264] —Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

Analysts examining the behavior of programmed assassins from John Lennon’s killer to various mass shooters today to various cases of homicides and suicides note the possibility of such radio hypnosis being instrumental in these cases. In such scenarios, suggestions fed hypnotically into the victim’s mind, become irresistible directives to action; after the action–the assassination, the mass shooting, the murder of family members, even children–the victim is deprogrammed with a post-hypnotic suggestion in order to “break the spell”.

The modern history of remotely affecting brains and behavior with energy weapons (involving microwave and radio frequencies, as well as ELFs or Extremely Low Frequencies) and Brain Computer Interfaces (involving implants) as exposed in studies, papers, and patents has been traced by various neuroexperimentation researchers, and can be studied in Renee Pittman Mitchell’s Remote Brain Targeting or Dr. Nick Begich’s Earth Rising: Toward a Thousand Years of Peace or Earth Rising II: The Betrayal of Science, Society, and the Soul–and other books and websites online. The ways and means of affecting brains and engaging in Mind Control, including directly inputting specific human voices into human heads, with specific directives, instructions, and commentary, are multifarious today: synthetic telepathy or Voice to Skull, a military term, and microwave hearing, the Frey effect, the Neurophone, are not fantasies but patents acknowledged by the military. (Some links at end.)

“The intelligence agencies are capable of transmitting voices and images directly to the cranium’s sensory pathways. The onset of advanced radio frequency technology has given rise to a coming generation of “thought police.” They are a profound threat to a democratic society. Radio frequency weapons have eased the malignant growth of fascism wuthin the intelligence agencies. Anyone who falls into disfavor with this elite can be condemned to interminable physical and psychological torture. The victim is often murdered without a trace.” –Alex Constantine, p 292, “CIA, Mind Control, and the US Postal Service,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

It is an absolute disgrace and should be a source of shame to all of humanity that our governments–who are inarguably engaging in contemporary programs of non-consensual brain, mind, body, and behavioral experimentation and undisclosed physical/biometric surveillance to include neuro-surveillance and body-surveillance, as well as in field testing of “non-lethal weapons” as reported by thousands of articulate and often highly educated victims worldwide (the primary culprits in the US appear to be the CIA, DIA, NSA, DARPA, and other branches of the DOD, including the USAF, while country-specific Intelligence agencies such as MI5, MI6, the Mossad, DGSE, and others are involved overseas–and Universities and research institutions supported by Defense and CIA grants, both known and classified, are also involved)–are engaging in a mass cover-up of these crimes against humanity, employing mainstream media, Law Enforcement, and the political tool of psychiatry to do so.

This is an organized, systemic Military/Intelligence cover-up, and the false, untenable public cover story being used for this criminal cover-up–as revealed by many FOIA requests, including by this writer–is the usual bland “classification of technologies in the interests of national security”.

It is only through this criminally deceptive means–a deception that has lasted more than 50 years–that such reliably-CIA-controlled media as The New York Times, which ran an extensive story on Esteban Santiago in the Sunday paper (Jan 8), covering his life and background in Puerto Rico, his abrupt change of personality from quiet and scholarly to abusive and violent post his Iraq war experience, and such agencies as the FBI, who were contacted by him in Alaska, when he walked in to report Mind Control neuro-operations by the CIA, can blandly present the very mention of Mind Control by the CIA as obviously delusional, obviously symptomatic of paranoia, obviously baseless in reality. Mainstream media news-readers and television-watchers, obviously, are being encouraged and trained and conditioned once more to fall in with this lie.

“There is a conspiracy within the intelligence agencies to conceal field-testing of highly-advanced mind control technology….The government still experiments on private citizens without their consent, often to death. They will continue to experiment and deny until forced to stop.” –Alex Constantine, p 294, “CIA, Mind Control, and the US Postal Service,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Global Statistics for Non-Consensual Neuro-Experimentation

Meanwhile, the body count mounts. Human rights activists continue to work to record the claims of those being victimized by remote neuro-technologies.

“Forty years later, the Department of the Army sanctioned the torture of civilians in a 1972 report entitled Controlled Offensive Behavior—USSR, a review of Russian scientific literature based upon 500 studies on the biological effects of “Super-high frequency electromagnetic oscillations”: “SHF may be used as a technique for altering human behavior. Lethal and non-lethal effects have been shown to exist. In certain non-lethal exposures, definite behavioral changes have occurred. There also appears to be a change in mammals when exposed to SHF in sensitivity to sound, light, and olfactory stimuli.”

The purpose of invasive electromagnetic brain experimentation, according to the report—which seems on hindsight to have cleared the way for experimentation on unconsenting subjects—was perceived by the Pentagon as “the creation of one or more of several possible mental states in the conscious or unconscious areas of the brain. The ultimate goal of controlled offensive behavior might well be the total submission of one’s will to some outside force.” –Alex Constantine, p 77, “Oscillatori Telegrafica,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

The most conservative reports place the numbers of non-consensual neuro-experimentees at about 2,000 within the US and 10,000 worldwide. Others suggest the numbers are much higher, ranging from 200,000 to 300,000 within the US, to millions worldwide. Some activists maintain that these finite numbers stem reliably from reports of those who know for certain they are being targeted and experimented on; others say millions, perhaps all 7 billion of us, are truly being experimented on (especially if you consider such technologies as nanotechnology from aerosols/chem trails, continuous ELF waves and pulses aimed at degrading brains, in conjunction with HAARP, and other remote mass brain stimulation technologies).

Some researchers maintain meticulous records of contacts from reporting victims, country by country (to be reported on here further). Even here, the ardent desire for Psy Ops by the military/Intelligence practitioners of military deception raises its ugly head: researchers and activists are often also contacted by fake victims, in apparent efforts to Deny/Degrade activism efforts, muddy the issue, and confuse the numbers.

In any case, it is an absolute fact that high numbers of people globally are reporting the experience of non-consensual neuro-experimentation and energy-weapons-usage to prominent researchers, writers, and human rights activists in this area (including to this writer), including the kinds of Mind Control mentioned above—radio hypnosis and synthetic telepathy. Several articles here cover this subject, which will continue to be covered here. Notable in this area is the case of Rohinie Bisesar, the talented young Canadian woman jailed for a sudden fatal stabbing of a stranger, and who reported mental manipulation, bio-robotizing (external physical manipulation of limbs), and synthetic telepathy, whose story was covered here earlier.

The Mind Control Psy Op is Run by the CIA/DOD Complex and Mainstream Media

The Mind Control Psy Op suggests that it is delusional to posit that the CIA is introducing voices into anyone’s head, or exhorting anyone through this covered means to go fight for ISIS or radio-hypnotizing anyone to kill on command.

The fact is, patents for the remote manipulation of human brains have been registered since and past the mid-70s, when MK ULTRA was supposed to have stopped. (Please see links below.)

The fact is, there are thousands today, testifying to remote Mind Control.

The fact is, mainstream media which both pretends Mind Control is far-fetched, a “conspiracy theory” and that MK ULTRA is history, and not highly active today, is slavishly obedient to the CIA. And the NSA. And the DOD. That would cover DARPA, and the DIA. All of whom–by many accounts–are the very parties engaging in Mind Control operations and experimentation today. Also the ones self-permitted to run military psychological warfare–or Psy Ops–on citizens today.

For all those who still read and absorb and look up to our long-established news agencies and outlets who arecontrolled by the CIA, it must be stressed that perhaps the only reason covert MK ULTRA-extending Mind Control programs have been relegated, historically and currently–by mainstream media analysts, journalists, and editors–to “fringe”, “conspiracy theory”, and “alternative” labels is because mainstream media, in the strong-fisted grip of the CIA/DOD complex, has been falling in line with CIA disinformation and propaganda directives and deliberately, strategically, unashamedly, and unethically feeding us with lies. For decades!

These too are crimes against humanity. Media is culpable, for the direct deception of humanity. As is organized psychiatry, for they work hand in hand, to keep the lie going.

To all unsuspecting consumers of mainstream media, who will believe anything because it’s been published by “leading newspapers” like the New York Times or the Washington Post, I would say: Call it Neuro Experimentation or call it Mind Control. Ignore it, and ignore reporting victims, like many top human rights organizations (which perhaps take funding from the Military and directions from the chimera of “National Security”) have, inexplicably, been doing. But recognize, that with remote brain manipulation, all of us, and all of our children are most definitely in danger.

Incontrovertible fact: Past Nuremberg, past the Nazi atrocities of World War II, past the reported atrocities of MK ULTRA from the ’50s to the ’70s, past the ’50s to the ’90s history of secret and non-consensual military radiation experiments, chemical experiments, biological experiments, syphilis experiments, Tuskegee and Guatemala, reported by such journalists as Eileen Welsome and Harriet K. Washington, non-consensual human experimentation has returned, shamefully, to the American landscape, and the global landscape.

Inform Yourself, Inform the World

We are surrounded by lies, sanctioned military deception, sanctioned Intelligence deception, sanctioned mainstream-media deception. More than ever, we need to individually exercise discernment in our response to the toxic deluge of misinformation, disinformation and plain lies washing over us. We’re not merely in Orwell’s 1984, we’ve tunnelled through into 1984-squared.

To close, on the subject of “non-lethal weapons” being used on the streets, and rampant non-consensual experimentation, two more American whistleblowers offer insight into the world of deception we’re inside.

NSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart’s recent interview on the Jeff Rense talk show (to be covered here separately shortly) offers unvarnished disclosure on the subject of Homeland Security which has morphed into Homeland Terrorism, the complicity of Intelligence agencies and military groups who have joined hands to direct criminal attacks with directed-energy weapons (DEWs) against non-criminal citizens, glibly naming them terrorists and spies and extremists and unleashing both undisclosed neuro/physical surveillance and undisclosed neuro-experimentation on them.

This video,Psy Ops Wars on Americans, by a former US Air Force Officer and whistleblower explains the Psy Ops further surrounding the Fort Lauderdale shooting, and this accompanying post at Facebook which he requested this writer to share discloses the radiation-weapon and neuro-weapon experimentation he has experienced and continues to experience.

Many analysts and alternative media researchers, as well as consciousness researchers tell us that the only way we can, as members of an exploited and acted-on public, put an end to this slide into complete totalitarian dementia, is by waking up individually and collectively and seeing through this charade for what it is. Our mere awareness can make a difference. Our collective awareness, they assure us, will inexorably lead to winds of change. It’s an optimism that might serve us well. Collectively we may find the clarity and courage to speak out with intent, challenge the prevailing narrative, and hold the criminals running this farce responsible. And accountable.

Those heads of Intel agencies who are currently spending a lot of time trying to divert attention to Russia — perhaps to build a case to further fortress and buttress themselves behind an even greater barrage of surveillance and security laws (if one can imagine that) — may well be seeking to deflect attention from the crimes against humanity they have already steadily been committing, crimes they continue to run undercover while blinding us with lies.

On his website, Ole Dammegard offers a list of suggestions for what any one of us can do, top of the list being,“Wake up – inform and educate yourself about what is actually going on in the world. It is only by us being asleep that this madness can go on.”

The world needs to know and act on the truth. Please inform yourself, inform the world.

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

In Dr. Farber’s words: “The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.”“The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, “is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system…“ I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIADoctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, CruelCompassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct.

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5” Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

“The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control”, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKEaccessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments, accessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control”, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.)

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“,Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His Father?”)

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

“With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at leastretain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“)

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016).

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

“Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

“This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

“Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

“Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Why I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009,TheComplex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others:

“Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008, “In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control: “Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind Justice, Research Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s — psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” — through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons — and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control”, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US”, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

“They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

•Do not engage with the voices in your head.

•If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

•Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert Duncan. Ramola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity — woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.

Officers standing over the body of Myron May on Nov. 20, 2014, after the shooting at Florida State University.

The vast majority of people with psychosis never resort to violence. Still, studies suggest that a small number of those experiencing psychotic episodes — especially paranoid thoughts, accompanied by voices making commands — are more likely to act on hostile urges than people without a mental illness.

And what if paranoid thoughts are put in their mind by the CIA? Is the percentage of identified TIs — who McPhate claims are paranoid psychotics — or real paranoids more likely to act on hostile urges than the angry non-TI, non-psychotic? McPhate presents no evidence to confirm this.

Furthermore several psychiatrists have demonstrated that the commonly prescribed “anti-depressants” (Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors or SSRI) actually cause some patients to become violent. Dr Peter Breggin writes, “It’s not the patient’s ‘mental illness’ that causes violence, it’s the drugs…[A]ntidepressants can and do cause violence on every level from people who feel more irritable or less loving toward their families to people who commit domestic violence or carry out mass murders.” (See Peter Breggin, July 25, Mad in America, “Violence Caused by Antidepressants”, accessed November, 2016).

Yet the idea that TIs and other “non-compliant psychotics” have a tendency toward violence is an integral part of the psychiatric metanarrative — a justification for forcing so-called patients, including TIs, to take psychiatric drugs, sometimes the very drugs that cause violence!

Many in the T.I. community, as anyone would, have repudiated the shootings by Mr. Alexis and Mr. May. But some also harbor troubling views about their perceived oppressors. They question how people could be so cruel.

Why is this troubling? Don’t most people take the view that their oppressors are cruel? It is troubling because McPhate accepts the psychiatric metanarrative which posits that the TI, the non-compliant psychotic, has a tendency to retaliate against her enemies — and thus requires psychiatric restraint — forced drugging.

Karen Stewart of Tallahassee, Fla., believes large numbers of regular people have been brainwashed by the National Security Agency into thinking that she is a traitor or terrorist. Wherever she goes, she says — to church, to the grocery store, to the doctor’s office — they are there, watching.

McPhate withholds critical information from the readers: Karen Stewart worked for the NSA as an Intelligence analyst from 1982 to 2010 — for 28 years. For 28 years she was never considered a psychotic. The biographical facts that are omitted buttress the TI metanarrative whereas the false depiction of Ms. Stewart strips her of her credentials, her authority, and reduces her to the status of an ordinary non-compliant lunatic. McPhate’s inaccurate depiction serves one purpose however — it strengthens the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative.

“Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed-Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.”(See The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Karen Stewart, NSA Whistleblower: Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place in the United States.

It baffles her, she said. But worse, “It makes me angry to see how many people in this country are sociopaths. They are absolute groupthink drones,” she said. “I don’t even consider them human anymore.”

“A need for meaning’

Susan Clancy, a Harvard-trained psychologist who has researched people who believe they’ve been abducted by aliens, said it could be extremely difficult to dissuade patients who have latched onto beliefs that they think explain their delusions.

“I think it’s a need for meaning and a need to understand your life and the problems you’re having,” she said. “You’re not some meaningless nobody. You’re being followed by the C.I.A.”

McPhate brings in yet another professional — this one from Harvard — to give weight to the psychiatric metanarrative. Yet he made contact with a number of former whistle-blowers, and quotes only one — without even mentioning her career at NSA.

Yet many of the people McPhate interviewed were not “meaningless nobodies.” Stewart was an NSA employee for decades. Robert Duncan, the whistle-blower whom he interviewed, is a former CIA employee and a scientific prodigy with multiple degrees from Ivy League schools. John Hall was a physician. Rosanne Schneider, whom he interviewed (but does not mention), is an author and artist. And furthermore there are numerous highly accomplished TIs. But including them would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative.

In that way, Dr. Clancy said, the behavior shares a trait with religious belief: To abandon it would be life upending.

“It wasn’t something that he was making up,” she said. “He really felt the way he felt and experienced what he experienced. I got to the point where I was just finally saying to him: “I’m very, very sad that you have to go through this. I wish that there was something that I could do.’ ”

The big hope is that society will wake up to what’s happening and put a stop to it, those who feel targeted say. In some cases, they do seek psychiatric help. In others, the delusions subside. For the rest, the prognosis isn’t good, psychiatrists say. Many contemplate suicide.

Mr.Trespas, now 49, says he went so far as to prepare a rope.

Sitting at a coffee shop in Brooklyn last month, he says the stalking has thankfully quieted down. But he says his harassers have also been seeding his body with Morgellons, a painful, insectlike infestation of the skin that many doctors say is psychosomatic.

He is gaunt, with weary, sad eyes. It’s been eight years since it all began, he says. He can’t hold a job. His friends have drifted away.

The TI community includes a wide range of persons — many are accomplished writers or professionals, as McPhate noted above. Yet by choosing one of the loneliest, most confused, and most forlorn TIs, one who is not even sure of the TI metanarrative, he reinforces the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative. This is a self-identified TI who may or may not be a TI. (Many TIs have reported that they have encountered disinformation agents posing as TIs.)

The online community has been a crucial support, he says. “But we don’t know exactly what’s happening,” he says. “Maybe we’re believing the wrong thing. I don’t know. That’s why I try to keep my mind open about who and what and why and how.”

Trepas is the only TI I’ve heard of who thinks “maybe we’re believing the wrong thing.”

One thing he is certain of though, he says: He’s not crazy.

McPhate ends the story on the cautionary motif of the psychiatric metanarrative: TIs are psychotics who refuse to accept that they have an illness — they are non-compliant psychotics.

It is a sad fact that the mainstream media has followed the lead of the psychiatric “authorities” in dismissing the allegations of TIs and defining them all as non-compliant treatment-resistant psychotics. They thus help to promulgate the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. Journalists and mental health workers rest their case ultimately on articles like that of Sheridan and James. This article has the appearance of a genuine “investigation,” of a scientific study — but it is all hot air. It substitutes reliability for validity, the agreement or shared fantasy of mental health professionals for correspondence to social reality. In other words the hidden sub-text of pseudo-investigations like Sheridan and James is, “It is so because we the experts say it is so.”

It is my hope that in the future The New York Times will serve its function as the fourth estate. Instead of dismissing TIs and promulgating the psychiatric metanarrative, McPhate or another journalist will seriously investigate TIs’ claims. Instead of interviewing only the most troubled TIs, and thus, wittingly or unwittingly, reinforcing the psychiatric claim that TIs are covert psychotics, this journalist would interview some of the more articulate spokespersons for TIs (some of whom are mentioned above), and seriously consider their allegations.

He or she would not treat psychiatric opinions as revealed truth but would give voice to dissidents who do not subscribe to the psychiatric metanarrative. The journalist would present the testimony of a few of the whistle-blowers who have worked in intelligence — Robert Duncan is today the most prominent and outspoken of former employees of American intelligence who worked on cybernetic weaponry. While not revealing classified information, Duncan has exposed the advanced technologies used against innocent persons. As a whistle-blower he follows in the tradition of men like Edward Snowden and William Binney whose views as a supporter of TIs could also be solicited.

The torture of American citizens described by TIs is a violation of international proscriptions against torture and against non-consensual experiments on subjects. The policy of both APAs prohibit psychiatrists and psychologists from inflicting harm upon anyone. The Coalition for an Ethical Psychology wrote:

The Coalition for Ethical Psychology has served an important and exemplary role within the American Psychological Association.They were formed in 2006 in response to psychologists’ participation at Guantanamo as mentioned above. Their goal is “to expose and oppose psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse with a national security rationale.” They state,

“We are alarmed that the APA, the world’s largest mental health organization, has overlooked, and even colluded with, subversion of psychology to state power. The ethical commitment of psychology as a profession is to improve human welfare universally.” (See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, About.)

This is a far more subversive goal than the founders may realize, since the entire mental health system is a regime of surveillance and control — of the “mentally ill” — and a servant of State power. CEP places APA members between conflicting mandates: On the one hand, is the ancient injunction of the helping professions to “do no harm” and the ethical obligation to serve the universal good, and on the other hand is their perceived obligation to the state to control trouble or troubling individuals. This is a conflict of interests considering the repressive and often punitive nature of the modern state. Another factor compromising their ability to help clients is the professionals’ financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry, which has been enormously lucrative for mental health professionals and leads them to place profits before people. This conflict is most obvious with psychiatrists but it affects everyone working in the “mental health” system.

The mental health system is a social control agency similar to law enforcement and criminal justice, although distinctive in many respects, as shown above. The linchpin of the system is the administration of psychiatric drugs disguised as medicine: Psychiatric patients in the public sector — state mental hospital or group homes and “out-patient treatment” — are often subjected to involuntary psychiatric “out-patient” commitment (most heinously, the involuntary injection of psychotropic drugs). Involuntary treatment has recently itself been declared to be a violation of international law and human rights by the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities. (See Tina Minkowitz, Mad in America, Oct 13 2013, “UN Prohibition of Psychiatric Commitment: Review and Analysis”.)

Dr. Bonnie Burstow writes,

“Take away the medical veneer and what we have here are substances given for non-existent disorders [problems in living], all of which by their nature create chemical imbalances, all of which disable, a number of which are associated with violence, all of which profoundly damage the brain. . . Is damage as treatment the best we can do? Is a society of rampant iatrogenic damage acceptable?” (Bonnie Burstow, Psychiatry and the Business of Madness, 2015, New York, p.200)

An ethical psychology or psychiatry is impossible in an unethical society. As R.D. Laing pointed out, the well-adjusted bomber pilot — dropping bombs on women and children of the “enemy” — serving the interests of the State and of corporations, would be considered “mentally healthy” by mental health professionals although he is committing war crimes that violates elementary moral norms. That is, in an ethically perverse society, conformity and adjustment is sanctified and murder in service of the state assumes a façade of moral legitimacy.

The organizers of Coalition for an Ethical Psychology (CEP) are therapists in private practice (not in the public sector) and thus relatively free of State coercion. They are often unaware that the public mental health system is normally abusive. Abuse is not an aberration. CEP and others dedicated to realizing the ideal of an ethical society seek to expose unethical practices in the helping professions, and pressure professionals to uphold transcendent ethical norms. Every act of exposure and protest — no matter how selective — gives witness to values that transcend the mental health system and the State to which it is customarily subordinate.

I hope I have made it clear that many or most self-identified TIs are victims of no-touch torture and/or non-consensual experimentation. The declaration that all TIs are delusional is based upon premises that do not stand up to historical examination. Thus, the promulgation of the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs by professionals who have failed to investigate the allegations of thousands of self-identified Tis is a failure to take its own ethical mandate — to improve human welfare — seriously. If not an act of deliberate deception, it is an act of bullshitting, to quote Levine. Sheridan and Young’s pseudo-scientific study (see above) claims to have “found” that all TIs are delusional psychotics and thus enables professionals to silence and “treat” them, while avoiding the inner moral conflict that would ordinarily result from condoning and facilitating (no-touch) torture.

Like psychologists’ participation in the torture regime in Guantanamo, treating TIs as psychotic is a blatant, witting or unwitting, subservience to Deep State actions that are violations of human rights as recognized by international law. It is comparable to the Soviet psychiatry “treatment” of dissidents. The fact that a small minority of persons within the American Psychological Association have succeeded on occasion in pushing the group to take the high road and stand up for universal human welfare against the dictates of the State is testimony to the power of the individual inspired by transcendent moral ideals. Had the individuals who formed CEP not had such a strong commitment to the truth, had they not forced APA membership to confront their leaders’ involvement in designing a torture regime, the APA would still permit its members to participate in torture under the guise of “national security.” As Bruce Levine said, it’s easier to continue to bullshit than to face the truth. CEP provides a lesson in leadership, in creative maladjustment, for all of us.

A logical next step for an organization like CEP which opposes “psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse” is to investigate the allegations of TIs and expose and oppose the a priori “diagnoses” of all TIs as psychotics. This focus may seem arbitrary or misleading since as stated, state-supported abuse is the norm in the mental health professions, but it has its own logic. Robert Whitaker and dissident professionals who have written for Mad in America oppose involuntary psychiatric drugging — another state-assisted abuse — but they would undoubtedly have no success in getting any professional body to publicly oppose involuntary drugging. Tina Minkowitz Esq., lawyer and psychiatric survivor, did however succeed in persuading the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities to assert forced treatment as a human rights abuse. (However UN bodies have little effect in the United States.) The CEP agenda must be guided by what is possible, and practical — and by the orientation of their own organization.

While treatment with brain-damaging drugs is the norm in the mental health system, overt torture is still regarded by most APA members with disdain — after all, it has no medical rationalization. Therefore it is possible that CEP could persuade members of the APA to oppose the routine labeling of TIs — without any investigation — as “psychotic.” (As I have shown, this diagnosis is “justified” by invalid studies.) An APA resolution of this kind would be publicized by the mainstream media, and would undermine the psychiatric metanarrative. Short of this, The New York Times and the mainstream media will continue to defer to Psychiatry and describe all TIs as non-compliant psychotics. Furthermore, while the corporate Press will continue to propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, it is time for journalists who have opposed US torture at Guantanamo and elsewhere, to expose no-touch torture on TIs and the complicity of mental health professionals in covering up these human rights abuses.

The therapeutic state fueled now by pharmaceutical industry grows without constraints while the Deep State operates without Congressional or public oversight. The development of a totalitarian regime — nominally a constitutional republic — in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America. The prevention of such a development is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system and disguised and justified as “medical” treatments for an ever increasing number of covert “psychotics.”

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

In Dr. Farber’s words: “The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.”“The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, “is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system…“ I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIADoctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, CruelCompassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct.

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5” Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

“The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control”, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKEaccessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments, accessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control”, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.)

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“,Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His Father?”)

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

“With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at leastretain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“)

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.